Complete AS400 System Administrator

AS/400 SYSTEM OPERATIONS System Administrator Tasks

© 1998-2001 Electronic Data Systems Corp. All rights reserved.

1

System and Equipment Overview Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 3 COMPUTER BASICS.................................................................... 4 Hardware ................................................................................. 4 Software................................................................................... 4 CPU - Central Processing Unit................................................. 4 Storage/Memory....................................................................... 5 Terms....................................................................................... 5 SYSTEM UNITS ............................................................................ 7 Models C, D, E, F - Ivory (Tan) Boxes...................................... 7 200/400 Series Black Box ...................................................... 11 300/500 Series - Black Box.................................................... 13 600 Series Black Box ............................................................. 15 700 Series Black Box ............................................................. 17 170 Series Black Box ............................................................. 19 TERMINALS................................................................................ 21 Dumb [DUM] Terminals.......................................................... 21 Power-On / Off ....................................................................... 21 Offline Setup .......................................................................... 21 Online Setup .......................................................................... 22 P.C. – PERSONAL COMPUTER ................................................ 23 Power-On............................................................................... 23 Power-Off............................................................................... 23 PC Message Indicators .......................................................... 23 SSS Devices .......................................................................... 24 USE THE KEYBOARD................................................................ 25 SIGN ON ..................................................................................... 27 Sign Off ...................................................................................... 27 AS/400 MAIN MENU (MAIN)....................................................... 28 DEALERLINE XL MAIN MENU (DMM000) ................................. 31 SYSTEM REQUEST MENU ........................................................ 33

April 2000

System and Equipment Overview

1-i

Table of Contents

PROMPTABLE FIELDS (F4) ...................................................... 37 TCP/IP AND TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTERS .......................... 38 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW - EXERCISE.............. 39

1-ii

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

OVERVIEW

System and Equipment Overview OVERVIEW This chapter provides basic information you will need to operate your AS/400. •

Computer Basics

•

System Unit and Control Panel

•

Workstations

•

Use the keyboard

•

Sign on and off the system

•

AS/400 Main Menu, DEALERLINE Main Menu, System Request Menu

•

Function keys and the command line and promptable fields

•

Printers

April 2000


1-3

COMPUTER BASICS

COMPUTER BASICS Computer is derived from the word compute, in other words, to calculate. There are three basic types of computers distinguished by their physical size and capacity: • Microcomputer • Minicomputer • Mainframe

Hardware Hardware is the physical components of the computer or the things you can touch. Hardware components include: - Keyboard - input device for the user to communicate with the computer - Monitor - output device for the computer to communicate with the user - Printer - output device used to produce hard copies of data - System Unit - AS/400 - Keyboard, Monitor, and Printers, are considered Peripheral devices.

Software Software is the programs or instructions which enable the computer to do various functions. Software includes: - Operating System (OS/400) - programs which control the interaction between the hardware and software - Application Software - programs which are used to manipulate user information (i.e. DEALERLINE XL)

CPU - Central Processing Unit The CPU is the "brain" of the computer which processes information. (All information is processed in the CPU.) All of the terminals are cabled to communicate with the CPU.

1-4


April 2000

COMPUTER BASICS

Storage/Memory There are three types of storage: -

Temporary Storage (CPU main memory)

-

Permanent Storage (DASD or hard drive) DASD is defined as Direct Access Storage Device - DASD is a disk unit (hard drive). A hard disk (hard drive) is present in a PC (personal computer).

-

External Storage (diskette, tape, or optical drive) Optical drive is also called a CD ROM.

The metric system is used to quantify storage. A bit is a binary digit in the binary numbering system. A byte consists of 8 bits which is equivalent to one character. 8 bits = 1 byte = 1 character K (Kilo) = 1,000 M (Mega) = 1,000,000 G (Giga) = 1,000,000,000 Examples:

128KB = 128,000 bytes = 128,000 characters 8MB = 8,000,000 bytes = 8,000,000 characters

Terms Upgrade/Software - Load newly enhanced software. Upgrade/Hardware - Additional drives - memory upgrade - new AS/400 system . ATF - Acronym for Application Temporary Fix. Identifies new application software distributed by EDS.

April 2000


1-5

COMPUTER BASICS

PTF - Acronym for Program Temporary Fix. A temporary solution to, or bypass of, a problem in an IBM licensed program. Operating System (OS/400) - The Operating System (OS/400) is a group of IBM licensed programs which allows you to interface with the AS/400 through menus or commands to control and allow for system activity. Initial Program Load (IPL) – Initial Program Load is the process that loads the Operating System (OS/400) into main storage from auxiliary storage, checks the internal system hardware, and prepares the system for user operation. Auxiliary storage is all addressable storage (DASD) other than main storage. Host Site / Remote Site Host Site – Physical location of the AS/400 – this is the main location. Remote Site – Another store that is connected to the Host Site (using the same AS/400) using NT routers, modems, and or remote controllers which use data circuits (telephone lines) to connect to the Host site. Release (Updates) - Identifies the version of software to be loaded on your system. Most of EDS releases can now be loaded using an EOD process. When a release is EOD, the release is electronically downloaded to the customer. It takes several days for the EDS Automotive Retail Group (ARG) to download a release to all facilities. A dedicated system is NOT required on the customer's AS/400 during the process of electronically downloading software (release). After the download is complete to the customer, the release displays on the EOD screen; the customer can select the release to run when selecting the DEALERLINE nightly backup to run. The release will then process with the DEALERLINE nightly backup. If the release fails, the system will automatically back out of the release and the system will be up and running the next morning. An error message that states the release failed prints at the system printer. If the release is too large to EOD, then the release is sent to customers on an EOD tape. After receiving the EOD tape, customers can load the tape anytime during the day; a dedicated system is NOT required. After the EOD tape is loaded, the release will display on the EOD screen, the same as if the release was electronically downloaded (EOD). To load an EOD tape, the tape in inserted into the tape drive and LODRUN TC is typed at a command line (see chapter 4 for more detailed information). It takes about 10 to 20 minutes for the EOD tape to be loaded on the customers AS/400. Again, after the release is loaded on the customer's system, it displays on the EOD screen.

1-6


April 2000

SYSTEM UNITS

SYSTEM UNITS Models C, D, E, F - Ivory (Tan) Boxes

9404 Control SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT 9406 Control Panel

POWER LIGHT

POWER SWITCH

POWER LIGHT

Power On Delayed Off

Power

Processor Active

On

POWER SWITCH

System Attention

Processor Active

System Attention

SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT

Delayed Off S/M

FUNCTION/ DATA DISPLAY

Function

Data

01

Function Select

SELECT SWITCH

02 03 04 11

ENTER BUTTON

Function O1 Display Selected IPL Select IPL A - IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code

Enter

Manual

Data

01

Normal


KEYLOCK SWITCH Functions

Secure

O1 Display Selected IPL04 Lamp Test 02 Select IPL 11 System Reference Code A - IPL 03 Start IPL

Auto

SELECT SWITCH

Select

Manual

Normal

KEYLOCK SWITCH

ENTER BUTTON

Enter

Secure

Auto

9402 Control Panel POWER LIGHT

Power On

Functions

Delayed Off 02 03 04 11

POWER SWITCH

O1 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code

Processor Active


System Attention

Manual

Normal

KEYLOCK SWITCH Select

SELECT SWITCH

April 2000

Enter

ENTER BUTTON

Function/ Data

01

Secure

Auto

FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY


1-7

SYSTEM UNITS

System Unit Control Panel C - F Models (9402 Model has an On/Off Button)

1 Power on Delayed off

2 3

Processor Active

System Attention

4 5

6 Function

Data 01

B

Functions 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL A - IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code

7 Select

Manual

Normal

Secure

Auto

11

8 Enter

S/N XXXXXXXXX

9

10 Unit Emergency On Off

1-8


April 2000

SYSTEM UNITS

The center of the AS/400 CPU is the System Unit Control Panel. The Control Panel consists of the switches and indicators used by the system operator to start up the system and monitor it for problems. The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions (refer to the previous pages for a diagram of the C - F Models system unit functions):

!

Models C thru F Ivory (Tan) Boxes are Non-RISC. The operating System will be version V3R2M0.

1.

Power Ready Indicator This green indicator is "lit" whenever the processing unit power supply is on. This indicator also blinks when the system unit is being powered on or off.

2.

Power Switch This switch is used to power on or power off the system unit.

3.

Processor Active Indicator This green light is lit when programs are being run by the processor. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink.

4.

System Attention Indicator This amber indicator is lit when the system encounters a problem that requires operator intervention. When this indicator is lit more information about the error encountered is provided in the Data Display.

5.

Function Display The Function Display shows the function information that has been entered. The left two positions indicate the number that is selected using the Select switch. This screen typically displays '01'.

6.

Data Display This screen typically displays the single letter 'B'. However, its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs.

7.

Select Switch This switch is used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter button is pressed.

8.

Enter Function Button This button is used to initiate the function currently selected by the Select Switch.

April 2000


1-9

SYSTEM UNITS

9.

System Unit Serial Number You may be required to give the system unit serial number to your service representative or marketing representative to ensure that you receive the proper service and products.

10. Emergency Power-Off Switch

only

The Emergency Power-Off switch is provided for emergency power-off , and is not intended for use as a power-on and off switch. This switch controls the power supplied to the system unit. It has priority over all other controls. This switch should normally always be on. 11. Keylock Switch This switch uses a unique key assigned to your system to select or limit the start up or shut down processing that is permitted. The Keylock may be set to one of four positions. Manual

Normal

Secure

Auto

Secure (locks control panel on the system unit) Manual (Attended IPL) Normal (Unattended IPL) Auto (this position will not allow you to start the system when doing an IPL unattended)

1-10


April 2000

SYSTEM UNITS

200/400 Series Black Box *This system does not have a keylock on the control panel, Function 02 allows you to select eight possible combinations of IPL (Initial Program Load) modes and types. Types A, B, C, and D can be selected in Manual (M) mode or in Normal (N) Mode. Your function /data display will be set with 01 BN.

2 POWER PUSH

1

BUTTON

POWER-ON LIGHT

4

3


PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT

Function/Data

01

BN

5 FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY

6

Enter

ENTER PUSH BUTTON

7 SELECT PUSH BUTTONS

Function/Data 01

BN

Enter

A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 200/400 SERIES BOX. THE FOLLOWING IPL/CODES DISPLAY ON THE DOOR: 01 02 03 04 11

April 2000


DISPLAY SELECTED IPL SELECT IPL START IPL LAMP TEST SYSTEM REFERENCE CODE

1-11

SYSTEM UNITS

The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a diagram of the 200/400 series system unit functions):

!

The 200 Black Box is a Non-RISC processor. The operating system will be version V3R2M0. The 400 Black Box is a RISC processor. The operating system will be version V3R7M0 or higher. The 400 also has an optical drive [CD ROM].

1.

Power On Light This green indicator is "lit" whenever the processing unit power supply is on.

2.

Power Push Button This button is used to power on or power off the system unit.

3.

Processor Active Light This green light is lit when programs are being run by the processor. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink.

4.

System Attention Light This indicator is lit when the system encounters a problem that requires operator intervention. When this indicator is lit more information about the error encountered is provided in the Function Data Display.

5.

Function/Data Display This screen typically displays '01 BN' However, its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs.

6.

Enter Push Button This button is used to initiate the function currently selected by the Select ↑ ↓ Buttons.

7.

Select Push Buttons These Select ↑ ↓ buttons are used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter Button is pressed

1-12


April 2000

SYSTEM UNITS

300/500 Series - Black Box

4 SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT

3 PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT

8

Processor Activity 1

2 Low

High

Low

KEYLOCK

High

4

3

2

Manual

POWER PUSH BUTTON

Normal

9

Auto Secure Mode

1 POWER-ON LIGHT

MODE BUTTON

6

Function/Data Enter

01

5

ENTER PUSH

BN

BUTTON


7 SELECT PUSH 01 02 03 04 11

BUTTONS

Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code

Processor Activity Low

High

Low

High

Manual Normal Auto Secure Mode

Function/Data Enter

01 02 03 04 11


A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE 300/500 CONTROL PANEL.

These panels on the 300/500 Series Box are BLACK.

April 2000


1-13

SYSTEM UNITS

The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a diagram of the 300/500 series system unit functions):

!

The 300 Black Box is a NON-RISC processor. The operating system will be version V3R2M0. The 500 Black Box is a RISC processor. The operating system will be version V3R7M0 or higher. The 500 also has an optical drive [CD ROM].

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Function/Data Display This screen typically displays '01 B' However, its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs.

6.


7.

Select Push Buttons These Select ↑ ↓ buttons are used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter Button is pressed.

8.

Plastic Black Key Keylock The plastic key card is used to unlock the Mode button so the Mode can be changed from Normal to Manual, etc..

9.

Mode Button This Button is used to change Modes [Manual, Normal, Auto, Secure] for IPLs, Power Downs, Reloads, and Install of Licensed Internal Code and Operating System.

1-14


April 2000

SYSTEM UNITS

600 Series Black Box

7

6 ENTER PUSH BUTTON

SELECT PUSH BUTTONS

5 01


↑

BN

↓

Enter

Function 01 02 03 04 11

4



3

1


POWER-ON LIGHT

POWER PUSH BUTTON

2

↑ ØØØØØØØØ

↓

Enter

Function 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code

A CLEAR DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 600 SERIES BOX. TO OPEN/CLOSE, SLIDE THE DOOR UP/DOWN.

THIS PANEL ON THE 600 SERIES BOX IS BLUE.

April 2000


1-15

SYSTEM UNITS

The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a diagram of the 600 series system unit functions):

!

The 600 Black Box is a RISC processor. The operating system will be version V3R7M0 or higher. The 600 also has an optical drive [CD ROM].

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


1-16


April 2000

SYSTEM UNITS

700 Series Black Box

6

7

ENTER PUSH BUTTON

SELECT PUSH BUTTONS

5 01


BN

↑

↓

Enter

Function 01 02 03 04 11

4



3

1


POWER-ON LIGHT

POWER PUSH BUTTON

2


↓

Enter



THIS PANEL ON THE 700 SERIES BOX IS RED/ORANGE.

April 2000


1-17

SYSTEM UNITS

The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a graphic of the 700 series system unit functions):

!


1.


2.


3.

Processor Active Light This green light is lit when the processor is running programs. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink.

4.


5.


6.


7.


1-18


April 2000

SYSTEM UNITS

170 Series Black Box Function/Data

01

FUNCTION/DATA

BN

DISPLAY

5

Functions

7

SELECT PUSH BUTTONS

6

ENTER PUSH BUTTONS

3

PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT

4

01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 1 1 S y s

Enter

1

1

2

POWER-ON LIGHT POWER BUTTON SERIAL NUMBER

Function/Data

Functions 01

Display Selected IPL

02

Select IPL

03

Start IPL

04 11

Lamp Test System Reference Code

Enter

1

2

A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE 170 SERIES BOX, WITH A CLEAR WINDOW OVER THE CONTROL PANEL.

THIS PANEL ON THE 170 SERIES BOX IS RED.

April 2000


1-19

2

SYSTEM UNITS

The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a graphic of the 170 series system unit functions):

!


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


1-20


April 2000

TERMINALS

TERMINALS Dumb [DUM] Terminals A dumb [DUM] terminal has no brain of it’s own, it receives all of it’s information from the AS400. One way to tell if your are using a dumb terminal, is there will be 24 function keys on the keyboard. Some of the new IBM terminals have a base that looks like a processor, but there is no floppy drive, CD drive, or tape drive.

Power-On / Off To power on: 1. 2.

Be sure power switch is in the 1 position (on newer terminals, the Power button returns to the same position). The green power light displays after the device is powered on.

To power off: 1. 2.

Be sure the power switch is in the 0 position (on newer terminals, the Power button returns to the same position). The power light goes out.

Offline Setup To access offline setup: 1.

Sign off, then power off of the terminal.

2.

Press and hold the Space bar while powering on the terminal .

3.

Release the Space bar when the Offline Menu displays (approximately 30 seconds). Three options display: 1.

Customize workstation Terminal mode, printer and workstation address and printer emulation type can be found in here among other options.

2.

Test Workstation – This area can be used to set the workstation to 132 columns.

3.

Update Serial Number

April 2000


1-21

TERMINALS

Online Setup To access Online Setup: 1.

Press the Setup key on the left side of the keyboard.

2.

Depending on the model, different options display, for example: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Setup Display Setup Printer Setup Input Devices Color Palette Setup Calculator

Usually the first two options are used; these contain options such as cursor style, row/column indicator, autodim and print key. For example in Setup Display, we can change the cursor mode simply by positioning the cursor on the desired mode and pressing the Space bar.

1-22


April 2000

P.C. – PERSONAL COMPUTER

P.C. – PERSONAL COMPUTER Not only can a PC be used as a workstation, it can be used for using MSWord, Spreadsheets, etc. GM Access also requires a P.C. One way you can tell if you are using a PC is if the keyboard has 12 function keys and a hard drive unit is attached (processor) and there is a CD drive, floppy drive, or tape drive, you are using a PC.

Power-On 1.

Be sure the Power push button is in the IN position (on newer PCs, the Power button returns to the same position). The power must be on for both the monitor and the processor.

2.

The green power light will display after the device is powered on.

Power-Off 1.

Be sure the Power push button is in the OUT position (on newer PCs the Power button returns to the same position). The power must be on for both the monitor and the processor.

2.

The power light goes out.

PC Message Indicators The following symbols display at the bottom of the PC screen when the PC is emulated to the AS/400: SA

–

System Available [This must be highlighted; this means the AS/400 recognizes the PC.]

MW –

Message Waiting

II

–

Input Inhibited; a command/job is being processed; the screen will be locked until processing completes.

IM

–

Insert text mode – This is highlighted when the Insert key is pressed - to remove Insert Mode, press the Insert key again.

KS

–

Caps lock activated

KB

–

Characters are stored in type ahead memory and will display when the current activity is finished.

P.C. users very often like to “hot key” between the AS/400 and another P.C. session. Holding down the Alt key and then pressing Esc is the most common “hot key.” Other “hot keys” might be Ctl+ ESC or

April 2000

Alt + Tab.


1-23

P.C. – PERSONAL COMPUTER

SSS Devices These devices are P.C. systems used by Saturn stores in the Service Department. The SSS is a Service Stall System. It actually is a large gray and red steel cabinet with a Computer in it; Technicians use this system to perform engine control system repairs, and diagnose other types of vehicle performance problems through the use of the TECH2 (Portable Diagnostic Tool).

1-24


April 2000

USE THE KEYBOARD

USE THE KEYBOARD The following table describes the most commonly used keys. The key location on your keyboard may differ. Key(s)

Function

Tab Key

Press Tab to move the cursor to the next field. This action does not delete any information previously typed.

Back Tab Key

Press Back Tab to move the cursor to the beginning of the previous field. This action does not delete any information previously typed. (PCs - usually Shift/Tab).

Backspace Key

Press Backspace to move the cursor back one character at a time. Each time you press Backspace the cursor moves back one space.

Delete Key

Press Delete to delete information. Each time you press Delete, the character the cursor is on is deleted.

Field Exit Key/Field + Key

Press Field Exit or Field + to accept the information you have just typed (both keys perform the same function; however, the Field + key is normally used for numeric fields). This action causes the following to occur: • The characters to the right of the cursor (in the active field only) are deleted. • The typed information is right-justified (moves to the right side of the field). • The cursor moves to the beginning of the next field.

Enter Key

Press Enter to accept the information you type or to choose an option from a menu.

Reset Key

Press Reset to correct a keyboard error. Keyboard errors are identified by a four-digit message flashing at the bottom-left corner of the screen.

Print Key/Print Scrn

Press Print/Print Scrn to print what is currently displayed on your screen. Printing the screen is very useful when you need to research a screen error or system message. The copy of your screen is also referred to as a “Print Screen”.

Shift/Roll Keys or PageUp/Page Down Keys

Press both the Shift and Roll keys together to move information up or down the screen or press the PageUp or PageDown keys. • If More or a + sign displays at the bottom of your screen, press the Shift and Roll ↓ keys simultaneously to move toward the end of the information or press PageDown if you are working at a PC. • If Bottom displays at the bottom of your screen, you have reached the end of the information. Press the Shift and Roll ↑ keys simultaneously to move toward the beginning of the information or press PageUp if you are working at a PC . If you are using a PC, press Shift plus a Function key to perform a function if the Function key is F13 through F24. For example, to press F13, press and hold the Shift key and press F1. To press F21, press and hold the Shift key and press F9. While the Shift key is pressed, F1 becomes F13, F2 becomes F14, F3 becomes F15, etc.

April 2000


1-25

USE THE KEYBOARD

Key(s) Cursor Movement Arrow Keys

↑ ↓ ← →

Function Press the Cursor Movement Arrow keys to move your cursor to the left, right, up or down.

Help Key

Press the Help key to view additional help information about AS/400 system messages that display on your screen. The F1 key is the same as the Help key. For PCs, F1 is the Help key.

Numeric Keys

The Numeric key pad can be used when you type numerical information.

System Request Key

Use this key to respond to system messages (e.g. Loading the next tape volume). To respond, press the Shift and SysReq keys simultaneously. Dashes will display at the bottom of the screen, then, type 6 and press Enter. The System Operator message screen displays. System Request is used in SALESLINE XL and SERVICELINE XL to bookmark.

1-26


April 2000

SIGN ON

SIGN ON When you turn on the power to your workstation, the Sign On screen displays. Signing on to the system initiates an interactive job. The name of the subsystem that the workstation is currently running in – QCTL is the subsystem for the system console and QINTER is the subsystem for all other workstations.

Serial Number of the AS/400 Sign On System . . . . . : Subsystem . . . . : Workstation ID. . :

S1020334 QINTER W5

Your User Name . . . . . . . . . Your Password . . . . . . . . . . Program/procedure . . . . . . . . Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current library . . . . . . . . . EEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDD SSSSSSSSS EEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDDD SSSSSSSSS EEE DDD DDD SSS EEEEEEEEE DDD DDD SSSSSSSSS EEEEEEEEE DDD DDD SSSSSSSSS EEE DDD DDD SSS EEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDDD SSSSSSSSS Dealer Systems Software Version 4.4 EEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDD SSSSSSSSS (C) Copyright 1994, All rights reserved (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP.

1980

Workstation ID

1998

1.

At Your User Name field, type your user identification code (User ID) and press Field Exit.

2.

At Your Password field, type your password and press Enter. If you type an incorrect User ID and Password more than three times, the system varies off the workstation.

3. Depending on how the user ID is setup, the AS/400 Main Menu or the DEALERLINE Main Menu displays.

You can assign any main menu to a User ID so this screen automatically displays after sign on. See the next sections, AS/400 MAIN MENU / DEALERLINE MAIN MENU.

Sign Off Signing off the system ends an interactive job. These are two ways to sign off: •

At a command line, type SIGNOFF and press Enter.

Or •

Type the Sign Off option number from a main menu (usually 90) and press Enter.

April 2000


1-27

AS/400 MAIN MENU (MAIN)

AS/400 MAIN MENU (MAIN) After signing on, the AS/400 Main Menu or the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000) displays. The AS/400 Main Menu (MAIN) displays eleven options that access AS/400 Main Menus; these menus are used by EDS Representatives for troubleshooting. When the IBM User ID QSECOFR is used to sign on to the system, the AS/400 Main Menu will automatically display. QSECOFR should only be used for System Saves and IBM operating system upgrades. QSECOFR should NEVER be used for daily work. MAIN

AS/400 Main Menu System:

S1020334

Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

User tasks Office tasks General system tasks Files, libraries, and folders Programming Communications Define or change the system Problem handling Display a menu Information Assistant options Client Access tasks

90. Sign off Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F23=Set initial menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1980, 1998.

F13=Information Assistant

F23, Set initial menu, - changes the initial menu that automatically displays after signing on. When you press F23, the menu currently displayed will be assigned as your initial menu.

1-28


April 2000


The following table describes the fields on the AS/400 Main Menu (MAIN): Field Menu ID Menu Title Menu Options

Command Line

Function Keys

Description A unique menu ID, located in the upper left corner, is used to identify each menu. In this case, MAIN is the menu ID for the AS/400 Main Menu. A menu tile at the top center identifies the menu. In this case, the menu title is AS/400 Main Menu. Menu options let you choose the general task you want to perform when you do not know the name of the AS/400 command that performs the same task. As with all menus, when you type an option at the command line and press Enter, one of the following happens: • Another menu displays • A command prompt displays • An informational screen displays • A command is executed Located below the menu options is the Selection or command prompt, below that is an arrow (===>). To the right of the arrow is the Command Line. At the command line, type an option number or a command. Located below the Command Line are the Function Keys applicable to the menu. F3=Exit, Ends the current task and returns to the screen you started from. F4=Prompt, Provides assistance when entering or selecting a command. F9=Retrieve, Displays the last command you typed and executed from the command line (and any parameters you selected). F12=Cancel, Cancels the current menu and returns to the previous menu. F13=Information Assistant, Accesses IBM User Support and Education Menu. F23=Set Initial Menu, Press F23 to change the initial menu that automatically displays after signing on. When you press F23, the menu currently displayed will be assigned as your initial menu.

Message Line

April 2000

Located below the Function Keys is the area of the screen that displays messages.


1-29


Option 1 - User Tasks Allows you to complete tasks related to your own job, for example display or change your job or output field, display or send messages, submit batch jobs, display or change your library list, and change your user profile. Option 2 - Office Tasks This option allows you to process text, handle documents and folders and manage other office activities. Option 3 - General Systems Tasks This option allows the following tasks to be completed on all jobs on the system: • use communications • use security • monitor and control jobs • monitor and control messages • display statuses • display system messages • save objects • restore objects Option 4 - Files, Libraries, and Folders Allows you to work with user data files, libraries and folders. Option 5 - Programming This option allows you to complete programming tasks by using the options from the programming menu. Option 6 - Communications Allows you to control and configure your communications network. Option 7 - Define or Change the System This allows you to configure, install or request hardware device information. You can also work with security through this area. Option 8 - Problem Handling This option allows you to start solving general system problems. Option 9 - Display a Menu This option allows you to select the menu screen to see rather than selecting the menu by option number. Option 10 - Information Assistant Options This option will tell you where to look for AS/400 information, how to comment on AS/400 information, and what is new in the current release of the AS/400 system. Option 11 - Client Access Tasks Select this option for user and/or administrative tasks associated with Client Access Tasks.

1-30


April 2000

DEALERLINE XL MAIN MENU (DMM000)

DEALERLINE XL MAIN MENU (DMM000) After signing on, either the AS/400 Main Menu or the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000) displays.

The DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000) displays nine options that allow you to access the DEALERLINE XL applications. DMM000

DEALERLINE XL Main Menu

Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SRS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM RAPID 2000

23. DEALERLINE XL Version 90. Sign Off Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

April 2000


1-31

DEALERLINE XL MAIN MENU (DMM000)

The following table describes the fields on the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000): Field Menu ID Menu Title Menu Options

Command Line

Function Keys

Description A unique menu ID, located in the upper left corner, is used to identify each menu. In this case, DMM000 is the menu ID for the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu. A menu title at the top center identifies the menu. In this case, the menu title is DEALERLINE XL Main Menu. Menu options let you choose the general task you want to perform when you do not know the name of the AS/400 command that performs the same task. As with all menus, when you type an option at the command line and press Enter, one of the following happens: • Another menu displays • A command prompt displays • An informational screen displays • A command is executed Located below the menu options is the Selection or command prompt, below that is an arrow (===>). To the right of the arrow is the Command Line. At the command line, type an option number or a command. Located below the Command Line are the Function Keys applicable to the menu. F3=Exit, Ends the current task and returns to the screen you started from. F4=Prompt, Provides assistance when entering or selecting a command. F9=Retrieve, Displays the last command you typed and executed from the command line (and any parameters you selected). F12=Cancel, Cancels the current menu and returns to the previous menu. F13=Information Assistant, Accesses IBM User Support and Education Menu. F16=AS/400 Main Menu, displays the AS/400 Main Menu. F23=Set Initial, changes the initial menu that automatically displays after signing on. When you press F23, the menu currently displayed will be assigned as your initial menu.

Message Line

1-32

Located below the Function Keys is the area of the screen that displays messages.


April 2000

SYSTEM REQUEST MENU

SYSTEM REQUEST MENU Display and respond to system messages, alternative sign on. To display the System Request Menu: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Press and hold the Shift key. Press and hold the Sys Rq / Attn key. Release both keys. Press Enter.

Note: If you are using a PC, press Alt + SysReq Depending on key mapping, it could also be Shift + Esc, or Alt+ Esc.

The System Request menu displays the following options displaying and responding to system messages: System Request

System: S102PCXM

Select one of the following:

1. Display sign on for alternative job 2. End previous request 3. Display current job 4. Display messages 5. Send a message

6. Display system operator messages 7. Display work station user 10. Start system request at previous system 11. Transfer to previous system 13. Start system request at home system 14. Transfer to home system Selection ===> F3=Exit F12=Cancel ( ) OPYRIGHT IBM ORP

More...

1980

1999

System Request

System: S1039845

Select one of the following: 90. Sign off

Selection ===> F3=Exit F12=Cancel (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP.

!

April 2000

Bottom.

1980, 1999

Options 1, 2, and 6 are the most common options used from the System Request menu.


1-33

SYSTEM REQUEST MENU

The following table describes the fields on the System Request menu: Field Menu ID Menu Title Menu Options

Selection Line

Function Keys

1-34

Description The System Request menu does not have a menu ID. A menu title at the top center identifies the menu. In this case, the menu title is System Request. Menu options let you choose the general task you want to perform when you do not know the name of the AS/400 command that performs the same task. Only menu options can be used from the System Request menu. A command line is not available from the System Request menu – only a selection line. At the Selection Line, type the menu option number for the function or procedure you want to perform. Located below the Selection Line are the Function Keys applicable to the menu. F3=Exit, Ends the current task and returns to the screen you started from. F12=Cancel, Cancels the current menu and returns to the previous menu.


April 2000

SYSTEM REQUEST MENU

Option 1 - Display sign on for alternative job This allows you to run multiple sessions from one terminal. It is recommended this option NOT be used! Option 2 - End previous request If you are in the middle of a job you wish to end and there is no Function or Command key to Exit or Cancel, this is an alternative. (Do not use to end batches - only use to end inquiry functions.) Option 3 - Display current job This option gives details about the job you are running. This information is beneficial for troubleshooting. Option 4 - Display messages This will allow you to view messages sent to your user ID or workstation. Option 5 - Send a message This allows you to send messages to users and/or workstations. Option 6 - Display system operator messages This will display any messages delivered to the system. They include forms changes and media needs. Option 7 - Display work station user This will show you the user and workstation information for this terminal. Option 10 – Start System Request at previous system Use this option to suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the previous system (the source or client system for the current system). The previous system either displays the System Request menu or starts the program specified in the SRQ10PGM keyword on the Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) command. The default is to display the System Request menu on the previous system. The system name located in the upper right corner of the System Request menu indicates the current system on which the interactive job was running when you presses the System Request Key. Option 11 – Transfer to the previous system Use this option to suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the alternative interactive job on the previous system (the source or client system for the current system). If there is no alternative interactive job currently running, the Sign On screen displays. The system name in the upper right corner of the System Request menu indicates the current system on which the interactive job was running when you pressed the System Request Key. Option 13 – Start system request at home system Use this option to suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the home system (the first system on which you entered the pass-through command). The home system either displays the System Request menu or starts the program specified in the SRQ10PGM keyword on the Start Pass Through (STRPASTHR) command. The default is to display the System Request menu on the home system. The system name located in the upper right corner of the System Request menu indicates the current system on which the interactive job was running when you pressed the System Request key.

April 2000


1-35

SYSTEM REQUEST MENU

Option 14- Transfer to the home system Use this option to suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the alternative interactive job on the home system (the first system on which you entered the pass-through command). If there is no alternative interactive job currently running, the Sign-On screen displays. The system name in the upper right corner of the System Request menu indicates the current system on which the interactive job was running when you pressed the System Request key. Option 90 - Sign off Select this option to end current job.

1-36


April 2000

PROMPTABLE FIELDS (F4)

PROMPTABLE FIELDS (F4) If a field on any screen displays an asterisk (*), there is a list of valid field entries you can display and choose from. Position the cursor at any field that displays an asterisk and press F4 to display the list of valid field entries.

For example: 1.

At a command line, type INZTAP and press F4. The Initialize Tape (INZTAP) screen displays. This screen includes a list of possible field entries: Initialize Tape (INZTAP) Type choices, press Enter. Tape device . . . . . New volume identifier New owner identifier . Volume identifier . . Check for active files

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

_______ *NONE *BLANK *MOUNTED *YES

Name Character value, *NONE... Character value, *MOUNTED *YES, *NO, *FIRST

Tape density . . . .

*DEVTYPE

*DEVTYPE, *QIC120, *QIC525

Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of tape option . . . . . . . Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*EBCDIC *REWIND *NO

*EBCDIC, *ASCII *REWIND, *UNLOAD *NO, *YES

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys

2.

. . . . .

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

Bottom F13=How to use this display

With your cursor positioned at the Tape Density field, press F4. The following screen displays: Specify Value for Parameter DENSITY Type choice, press Enter. Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . :

Tape density . .

CHARACTER

*CTGTYPE

*DEVTYPE

*FMT3570 *FMT3570E *FMT3590 *FMT3590E

*QIC120 10000 *QIC525 16000 *QIC1000 *QIC2GB *QIC3040

1600 3200 6250 *FMT2GB 43200 *FMT5GB *FMT7GB

*FMT3480 38000 *FMT3490E F3=Exit

3.

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

F13=How to use this display

F24=More keys

Type the correct tape density at the Tape density field, press Field Exit then Enter.

April 2000


1-37

TCP/IP AND TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTERS

TCP/IP AND TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTERS EDS uses TCP/IP and TWINAX ATTACHED printers – the difference between the two is how the printers communicate with the AS/400. A TCP/IP printer communicates through a network controller which would create a virtual device description, and needs an I/P address (an example of an I/P address is 10.129.82.110). A TWINAX ATTACHED printer communicates through a workstation controller card, and has a controller address with a port/address. An example would be port 1 address 5. TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTERS set ups for printers. 1.

Parallel Attached Printer – Parallel attached printers receive all of their information from the terminal or PC they are physically connected to – the printer address must be set up in the terminal or PC the printer is physically connected to. The printer is connected to the terminal or PC by a bi-directional parallel cable which is usually black, gray or beige in color and is approx. 6 ft to 25 ft in length. (Parallel cable for a Laser printer can have a maximum length of 10 ft. ONLY). The connectors on the parallel cable are about 2 inches wide and are rectangular in shape. The back of the terminal or PC has a printer port and this is where the parallel cable is connected to from the printer. An easy way to find out if the printer is parallel is to leave the printer powered on, and then signoff of the workstation that you believe the printer is parallel to and then power off the workstation, then power the workstation back on, the printer should initialize/response as if it was just powered on.

2.

Serial Printer – (Stand Alone) Serial Printers receive their printer address and information from a serial card or I/O card, this card allows the printer to communicate with the AS/400. The cable connection for a serial printer will either be a twinax cable or twisted pair cable. The twinax cable has about a ½-inch wide round silver connector and is either connected to a pigtail, T-connector or may be connected directly into a twinax connector on the printer. The twisted pair cable will be connected to a balun which is a 6 inch cable that on one side has a twinax connector on it, and the other side has a RJ45 end on it.

A TCP/IP printer needs an I/P address (Internet Protocol) – an example of an I/P address is 10.129.82.110 TCP/IP Printers are considered a NETWORK printer. (This Stand Alone printer would use CAT5 cable and be connected through a hub.) Usually a TCP/IP printer is a Laser printer, the exception would be a printer attached to an external LAN adapter card such as a Mark Net Pro card. Laser printers will have a menu option on the control panel that allows an I/P address to be configured and will also have an I/O card installed. TCP/IP Stand Alone printer CABLE will ALWAYS be CAT5 to a hub.

1-38


April 2000

SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW - EXERCISE

SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW - EXERCISE 1.

What does OS/400 stand for? _________________________

2.

At the end of each work day, you should: _____ _____ _____ _____

3.

A. B. C. D.

At the Main Help Menu In the middle of an application At the sign-on screen At a command line

Indicate which key to press to solve each of the conditions below: F3 F4 A. _____ B. _____ C. _____ D. _____

5.

Sign off the workstation Power down AS/400 Perform an IPL All of the above

Before you can turn off a workstation, it must be: _____ _____ _____ _____

4.

A. B. C. D.

F9 F23 Display the last command you ran from the command line End the current task and return to the display from which the task was started Display additional fields for a command, and to display a list of valid field entries if a field has an asterisk (*). Change the initial menu (the first menu you see after you sign-on) in your user profile

List one way to sign off your terminal. _____________________________________________________

6.

Name 3 pieces of equipment considered peripheral devices. ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________

April 2000


1-39


7.

Name 2 types of software programs found on your AS/400. ___________________________ ___________________________

8.

What is a CPU?

9.

The contents of permanent storage are lost when the AS/400 is powered off. _____ _____

10.

True False

The AS/400 Processor Active light indicates: _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

A system problem has occurred Users are signed on to the system CPU activity is occurring

11. How can you tell if your system is using a RISC Processor?

12. How can you tell if a printer is parallel or serial attached?

13. If the cursor keeps blinking on a dumb terminal and you find it annoying, how do you change the cursor to a solid block?

14. What is an I/O card? What does it do? Is it on a parallel attached or serial printer?

15. What is the difference between a Host Site (main store) and a Remote Site?

1-40


April 2000


Solutions to System and Equipment Overview - Exercise 1.

Operating System/400. This is the IBM program that works in the background managing your system.

2.

A. You should sign off your workstation whenever you leave it unattended.

3.

C.

4.

A = F9 B = F3 C = F4 D = F23

5.

At a command line, type SIGNOFF and press Enter. Or From any menu, type the option number to Sign Off.

6.

Keyboard, monitor, printer.

7.

Operating System, DEALERLINE Application Software.

8.

The Central Processing Unit (CPU) is the "brain" of the computer which processes information.

9.

False.

If the Sign On screen does not display after the workstation is powered off, you may need to end the job that was processing or vary the workstation back on before it is usable. Also, job that was processing can become locked up, and you will be unable to end the job.

10. C. CPU activity is occurring 11. The system has a CD ROM Drive OR the Operating System is V3R7 or higher. 12. The easiest way is to look at the connectors- A parallel attached printer has a connector that is about 2 inches wide, a serial connector is about a ½ inch wide. Also turning the workstation off and back on will indicate the printer is parallel attached if the printer jumps when the workstation is powered back on. 13. Press the Setup key on the left side of the keyboard and go into Setup Display. Position the cursor on the desired cursor mode and press the Space bar. 14. An I/O card allows a serial attached printer to communicate with the AS/400. 15. The Host Site (main store) houses the AS/400. The Remote Site is connected to the main store by modems and data circuit (telephone line).

April 2000


1-41

2

IPL/Power Up/ Down Table of Contents

OVERVIEW..................................................................................... 1 BEIGE BOX MODELS C, D, E, F ................................................... 3 Control Panel Graphics ................................................................. 3 Power Down Due to Pending Emergency...................................... 4 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off ...................................... 6 Forced Power Down ...................................................................... 7 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On...................................... 8 Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series ...................................... 11 Control Panel Graphics ............................................................... 11 Power Down Due to Pending Emergency.................................... 15 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off .................................... 17 Forced Power Down .................................................................... 18 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On.................................... 19 Black Box 300/500 Series ........................................................... 22 Control Panel Graphics ............................................................... 22 Power Down Due to Pending Emergency.................................... 23 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off .................................... 25 Forced Power Down .................................................................... 26 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On.................................... 27 IPL, POWER UP / DOWN - EXERCISE........................................ 30

April 2000

IPL, Power Up / Down

2-i

Table of Contents

This page intentionally left blank.

2-ii


April 2000

OVERVIEW

IPL, Power Up / Down OVERVIEW An IPL (Initial Program Load) starts the AS/400; it loads the Operating System (OS/400) into main storage from auxiliary storage, checks the internal system hardware, and prepares the system for operation. An IPL should be performed once a week. Before performing an IPL, these should not be any system activity – the system should be dedicated. An unattended (normal) IPL can be completed by the System Administrator regardless if the AS/400 is powered On or Off; you can also select an option to schedule a DEALERLINE nightly backup to process first, then an IPL [Backup with Power Down]. If you choose the option to perform a DEALERLINE nightly backup, with a Power Down, the backup must be submitted to run after 22:00:00. If the DEALERLINE nightly backup procedure requires a second tape cartridge, the second tape cartridge must be loaded and the message to load the second tape must be answered before 5:00 a.m.

It is recommended a DEALERLINE Nightly Backup with a power down be completed once a week by selecting the Power Down with DEALERLINE Backup option. See the Backups chapter for more information. The system console must always remain powered on during any IPL.

April 2000


2-1

OVERVIEW


2-2


April 2000

BEIGE BOX MODELS C, D, E, F

BEIGE BOX MODELS C, D, E, F Control Panel Graphics 9404 Control Panel SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT

9406 Control Panel

POWER LIGHT

POWER SWITCH

POWER LIGHT

Power On Delayed Off

Power

Processor Active

On

POWER SWITCH

System Attention

Processor Active

System Attention


Delayed Off S/M


Function

Data

01

Function Function O1 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL A - IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code

Select

SELECT SWITCH ENTER BUTTON

Manual

Data

01

Normal


KEYLOCK SWITCH Functions

Enter

Secure

O1 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL A - IPL 03 Start IPL

Auto

SELECT SWITCH

Select

04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code

Manual

Normal

KEYLOCK SWITCH

ENTER BUTTON

Enter

Secure

Auto

9402 Control Panel POWER LIGHT

Power On

Functions

Delayed Off

POWER SWITCH

O1 02 03 04 11


Processor Active

Manual


System Attention

Normal

KEYLOCK SWITCH Select

SELECT SWITCH

April 2000

Enter

ENTER BUTTON

Function/ Data

01

Secure

Auto



2-3


Power Down Due to Pending Emergency These steps are for powering off Beige Box Models C, D, E, or F. Complete the following steps to power down the system (from power on) to prepare for a pending or imminent emergency or disaster, for example a hurricane, or if electrical power is being shut off due to transformers being replaced.

If you are unable to use a workstation to power down the AS/400, you can force the AS/400 down by using the control panel – go to step 4. 1.

Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization, for example, MSECOFR.

If this is an emergency that you only have minutes or seconds to prepare for, go to step 2. 2.

At a command line, type

3.

The screen will go blank in approximately 2 to 4 minutes.

PWRDWNSYS *IMMED

and press Enter.

Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off, then continue to step 5. 4.

If you are unable to use a workstation to power down the AS/400, force the AS/400 down using the control panel: a.

Turn the Key on the AS/400 control panel to Manual.

b. c.

Push the white Power switch down, to Delayed Off. The power light will begin to blink. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will change during the power down.

Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off.

5. 6.

Power Off UPS (if the AS/400 is attached to a UPS). Unplug the electrical cord from the wall outlet for UPS (if no UPS, unplug the AS/400 electrical cord). After the electrical work is complete or the natural disaster is over, and power to the building is restored, continue to step 7.

2-4


April 2000


7.

After the power is restored to the building, plug the electrical cord back in the wall outlet for UPS, then power On UPS. If no UPS, plug the electrical cord back in the wall for the AS/400.

8.

After UPS is powered on, or the AS/400 electrical cord is plugged back into the wall outlet, continue to step 9 to begin an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off.

9. Verify the power light on the AS/400 is Off. 10.

Verify the Key on the AS/400 control panel is set to Normal.

11.

Verify 01 B displays in the Function/Data window.

12.

Verify the system console is powered on.

!

The system console is the device at port 0, address 0 in QCTL subsystem.

13. Push the white Power switch up. The switch returns to the center position and the power light blinks momentarily, then stays lit. 14. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL. 15.

After the IPL is complete (approximately 20 to 30 minutes), the Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on.

16. Sign onto the system.

April 2000


2-5


Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off These steps are for Beige Box Models C, D, E, or F. Follow these steps to IPL the AS/400 when the Power

Light is off

1.

Verify the power light is Off.

2.

Verify the Key on the AS/400 control panel is set to Normal.

3.

Verify 01 B displays in the Function/Data window.

4.


5.

!

(possibly due to a power failure).


Push the white Power switch up. The switch returns to the center position and the power light blinks momentarily, then stays lit.

6. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL. 7.


8.

Sign onto the system.

2-6


April 2000


Forced Power Down These steps are to force a power down for Beige Box Models C, D, E, or F. This procedure should only be used if all devices are locked up and/or the amber system attention light is on,

AND if you are instructed by an EDS Representative. 1.

Verify the power light is

On.

2. Record any Service Reference Code (SRC) numbers in the Function/Data window. The amber system attention light will be on.

!

Do not power down if SRC numbers display in the Function/Data window AND the amber system attention light is NOT on.

a.

Record the SRC numbers for Function 11.

b.

Press the Select button to display Function 12.

c.

Press the Enter button.

d.

Record the SRC numbers for Function 12.

e.

Using the IBM manuals, locate the SRC codes. After reading the description of all steps/procedures are completed.

the code, verify

3.

Turn the Key on the AS/400 control panel to Manual.

4.

Push the white Power switch down, to Delayed Off. The power light will begin to blink.

5.

The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will change during the power down.

6.

After the power light goes off, turn the Key on the AS/400 control panel to Normal, then follow the instructions for an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off.

April 2000


2-7


Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On These steps are for powering on Beige Box Models C, D, E, or F. It is recommended an unattended IPL from Power On be performed from the Backup Menu (SAM100), option 2, Backup DEALERLINE Database Power Down System, once a week. The following procedure explains how to perform an unattended (normal) IPL. Complete the following steps to perform an unattended (normal) IPL, if the AS/400 is already powered-on: 1. 2.

Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization, for example, MSECOFR. Ensure all users are signed off the system, including SALESLINE users, and no jobs are processing. a.


WRKSBSJOB

QINTER

and press Enter.

The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). If any jobs display, have the corresponding user(s) sign off the system. Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). b.


WRKSBSJOB

QBATCH

and press Enter.

The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). If any jobs display, wait until they complete before continuing. Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display).

2-8


April 2000


c.


WRKSBSJOB

DLCOMMSBS

Work with Subsystem Jobs Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .:

and press Enter. S1025232

DLCOMMSBS

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Job Opt Job User Type GMXS_SVR POLLDCS MSECOFR BATCH POLLDCS POLLPREP MSECOFR BATCH POLLPREP POLLRAPID MSECOFR BATCH POLLRAPID MSECOFR BATCH

5=Work with 13=Disconnect

6=Release

-----Status----ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE

7=Display message

Function PGM-CA4000CL Function PGM-CDPOLLCL PGM-CDPOLLCL DLY-16:30:00 DLY-16:30:00 PGM-CRPOLLCL PGM-CRPOLLCL

Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel

! 3.

F9=Retrieve

F11=Display schedule data

If Job POLLPREP displays with DLY... as the Function, or GMXS_SVR, POLLRAPID or POLLDCS displays with PGM... as the function, and no other jobs display, continue to step 3. If the function is not DLY... or PGM... on these jobs, wait until these jobs complete before continuing.

Verify the key on the AS/400 control panel is set to Normal.

April 2000


2-9


4.


PWRDWNSYS

and press F4.

The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) screen displays. Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices, press Enter. How to end . . . . . . . . . . . Delay time, if *CNTRLD . . . . . Restart after power down . . . . IPL source . . . . . . . . . . .

5.

6.

*IMMED 3600 *YES *PANEL

*CNTRLD, *IMMED Seconds, *NOLIMIT *NO, *YES *PANEL, A, B, D

Complete the following : a.

At the How to end field, in place of the default value, type press Field Exit.

*IMMED

b.

At the Delay time, if *CNTRLD field, leave the default value 3600

c.

At the Restart after power down field, type *YES

d.

At the IPL source field, leave the default value *PANEL

e.

Press Enter to begin the power down with restart (IPL). Leave the terminal powered on.

The Function Data window displays numbers that will increment during the IPL.

After the IPL is complete (approximately 20 to 30 minutes), a Sign On screen left powered on. 7.

2-10

and

displays at all terminals



April 2000

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series 170 Series Box

Control Panel Graphics

Function/Data

01

BN


Functions 01 02 03 04

Select push buttons

Enter Push Button Processor Active Light System Attention Light

Enter

1

Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test 11 System Ref ere nce Co de

2

POWER-ON LIGHT

POWER BUTTON

SERIAL NUMBER

Function/Data

Functions 01 02

Display Selected IPL Select IPL

03

Start IPL

04 11

Lamp Test System Reference Code

Enter

1

A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE 170 SERIES BOX, WITH A CLEAR WINDOW OVER THE CONTROL PANEL.

2

THIS PANEL ON THE 170 SERIES BOX IS RED.

April 2000


2-11

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

200/400 Series Box

BUTTON

POWER-ON LIGHT



POWER PUSH

Function/Data

01

BN

Enter


ENTER PUSH BUTTON

SELECT PUSH BUTTONS

Function/Data 01

BN

Enter

A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 200/400 SERIES BOX. THE FOLLOWING IPL/CODES DISPLAY ON THE DOOR: 01 02 03 04 11

2-12


DISPLAY SELECTED IPL SELECT IPL START IPL LAMP TEST SYSTEM REFERENCE CODE

April 2000

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

600 Series Box ENTER PUSH BUTTON

SELECT PUSH BUTTONS

01


BN

↑

↓

Enter

Function 01 02 03 04 11




POWER-ON LIGHT

POWER PUSH BUTTON


↓

Enter



THIS PANEL ON THE 600 SERIES BOX IS BLUE.

April 2000


2-13

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

700 Series Box ENTER PUSH BUTTON

SELECT PUSH BUTTONS

01


BN

↑

↓

Enter

Function 01 02 03 04 11




POWER-ON LIGHT

POWER PUSH BUTTON


↓

Enter



THIS PANEL ON THE 700 SERIES BOX IS RED/ORANGE.

2-14


April 2000

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

Power Down Due to Pending Emergency These steps are for powering off the Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series. Complete the following steps to power down the system (from power on) to prepare for a pending or imminent emergency or disaster, for example a hurricane, or if electrical power is being shut off due to transformers being replaced.





3.


PWRDWNSYS *IMMED

and press Enter.

Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off (light next to the white Power button), then go to step 5. 4.


Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window.

b.


c.

Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 B M displays in the Function/Data window.

d.

Press the Enter button. 02 displays in the Function/Data window.

e.

Press the Enter button again. 02 B M displays in the Function/Data window.

f.

Press the White Power button.

! g.

0

?

If a zero ( ) and a flashing question mark ( ) display on the right side of the Function/Data display, press

the white Power button again.


April 2000


2-15

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off (light next to the white Power button).

5.

Power Off UPS (if the AS/400 is attached to a UPS).

6.

Unplug the electrical cord from the wall outlet for UPS (if no UPS, unplug the AS/400 electrical cord). After the electrical work is complete or the natural disaster is over, and power to the building is restored, continue to step 7.

7.

After the power is restored to the building, plug the electrical cord back in the wall outlet for UPS, then power On UPS. If no UPS, plug the electrical cord back in the wall for the AS/400.

8.


9.

Open the control panel door on the AS/400.

Verify the power light is Off (light next to the white Power button). 10.

11.

12.

Verify 01 B N or 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. •

If 01 B N or 02 B N displays, continue to step 11.

•

If 01 B N or 02 B N does not display, complete the following:

↑

↓

↑

↓

a.

or Down Press the Select button (Up Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window.

b.


c.

Arrows below the Function/Data Press the Select button (Up or Down window) until 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window.

d.


e.

Press the Enter button again. 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window.


!


Press the white Power button on the AS/400. The Power light blinks momentarily, then stays lit.

13.

The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL.

14.


15.


2-16


April 2000

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off These steps are for Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series. Follow these steps to IPL the AS/400 when the power 1.

light is off (possibly due to a power failure).


Verify the Power light is Off (light next to the white Power button). 2.

3.

4.

Verify 01 B N or 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. •

If 01 B N or 02 B N displays, continue to step 3.

•

If 01 B N or 02 B N does not display, complete the following: a.

Write down the SRC code in the Function/Data window.

b.

Press the Select button (Up or Down Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window.

c.


d.

Arrows below the Function/Data Press the Select button (Up or Down window) until 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window.

e.


f.

Press the Enter button again. 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window.

↑

↓

↑

↓


!



5.

The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL.

6.


7.


April 2000


2-17

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

Forced Power Down These steps are to force a power down for the Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series. This procedure should only be used if all devices are locked up and/or the amber system attention light is on,

AND if you are instructed by an EDS Representative. 1.


Verify the power light is On (green light next to the white Power button). 2.

Record any Service Reference Code (SRC) numbers in the Function/Data window or from the system console screen. (The amber system attention light will be on.)

! a.


Verify if any error messages display at the system console.

•

If error messages display, record the information and

immediately inform a

Hardware Specialist. •

If no error messages display at the system console, continue to step 2b.

b. Using the IBM manuals, locate the SRC codes. After reading the description of all steps/procedures are completed.

the code, verify

3.


4.


5.

Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 B M displays in the Function/Data window.

6.


7.

Press the Enter button again. 02 B M displays in the Function/Data window.

8.

Press the White Power button.

!

0

?

If a zero ( ) and a flashing question mark ( ) display on the right side of the Function/Data display,

press the white Power button again.

9.


10.

After the power light goes off, change the system back to Normal Mode by changing the Function/Data window to 02 B N, then follow the instructions to perform an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off.

2-18


April 2000

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On These steps are for the Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series. It is recommended an unattended IPL from Power On be performed from the Backup Menu (SAM100), option 2, Backup DEALERLINE Database Power Down System, once a week. The following procedure explains how to perform an unattended (normal) IPL. Complete the following steps to perform an unattended (normal) IPL, if the AS/400 is already powered-on: 1.

2.

Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization, for example MSECOFR. Ensure all users are signed off the system, including SALESLINE users, and no jobs are processing. a.


WRKSBSJOB

QINTER

and press Enter.



WRKSBSJOB

QBATCH

and press Enter.


April 2000


2-19

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

c.


WRKSBSJOB

DLCOMMSBS



DLCOMMSBS


5=Work with 13=Disconnect -----Status----ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE

6=Release

7=Display message



! 3.


If Job POLLPREP displays with DLY... as the Function, or GMXS_SVR, POLLRAPID or POLLDCS displays with PGM... as the Function, and no other jobs display, continue to step 3. If the Function is not DLY... or PGM... on these jobs, wait until these jobs complete before continuing.

01 B N

Open the control panel door. Verify the Function/Data window.

or

02 B N

displays in

•

If

01 B N

or

02 B N

displays, continue to step 4.

•

If

01 B N

or

02 B N

does not display, complete the following:

↑

↓

a.

Press the Select button (Up or Down Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window.

b.


c.

Press the Select button (Up window) until

2-20

F9=Retrieve

02 B N

↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data displays in the Function/Data window.

02

d.


e.

Press the Enter button again.

displays in the Function/Data window.

02 B N

displays in the Function/Data window.


April 2000

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series

4.


PWRDWNSYS

and press F4.

Depending on the operating system, one of the following Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) screens displays. Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices, press Enter.

How to end . . . . . . . . Delay time, if *CNTRLD . . Restart options: Restart after power down Restart type . . . . . . IPL source . . . . . . . .

*IMMED 3600

*CNTRLD, *IMMED Seconds, *NOLIMIT *NO, *YES *IPLA, *SYS, *FULL *PANEL, A, B, D

*YES *IPLA *PANEL

This screen displays if the operating system is V4R1M0 or higher.

Or Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices, press Enter.

How to end . . . . . . . . Delay time, if *CNTRLD . . Restart after power down IPL source . . . . . . . .

5.


Complete the following:

*IMMED

a.


b.

At the Delay time, if *CNTRLD field, leave the default value 3600.

c.

At the Restart after power down field, type

! 6.


This screen displays if the operating system is V3R7M0 or lower.

and

*YES

If the operating system is V4R1M0 or higher, the Restart type field will display. *IPLA

d.

At the Restart type field, type

e.

At the IPL source field, leave the default value

f.

Press Enter to begin the power down with restart [IPL]. Leave the terminal powered on.

*PANEL.

The Function Data window displays numbers that will increment during the IPL. After the IPL is complete (approximately 15 to 30 minutes), a Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on.

7.


April 2000


2-21

Black Box 300/500 Series

300/500 Series Black Box 300/500 Series SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT

Control Panel Graphics Processor Activity 1

2 Low

Low

High

KEYLOCK

High

4

3

Manual

POWER PUSH BUTTON

Normal Auto Secure Mode

POWER-ON LIGHT

MODE BUTTON

Function/Data Enter

01

BN

ENTER PUSH BUTTON

FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY SELECT PUSH 01 02 03 04 11


BUTTONS

Processor Activity

Low

High

Low

High

Manual Normal Auto Secure Mode

Function/Data Enter

01 02 03 04 11


A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE 300/500 CONTROL PANEL.

These panels on the 300/500 Series Box are BLACK.

2-22


April 2000


Power Down Due to Pending Emergency These steps are for powering off the Black Box Series 300/500. Complete the following steps to power down the system (from power on) to prepare for a pending or imminent emergency or disaster, for example a hurricane, or if electrical power is being shut off due to transformers being replaced.





3.


PWRDWNSYS *IMMED

and press Enter.

Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off (light next to the white Power button), then go to step 5. 4.


Verify the Black Plastic Keylock key card is in the keylock.

b.

Change the Mode to Manual by pressing the Mode button until the Manual light is on.

c.

Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down displays in the Function/Data window.

d.


e.

Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 B displays in the Function/Data window.

f.


g.

Press the Enter button again. 02 B displays in the Function/Data window.

h.

Press the white Power button.

!

0

↓

Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02

?

If a zero ( ) and a flashing question mark ( ) display on the right side of the Function/Data display, press

the white Power button again.

i. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will increment during the IPL.

Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off (light next to the white Power button). April 2000


2-23


5

.

6.

Power Off UPS (if the AS/400 is attached to a UPS). Unplug the electrical cord from the wall outlet for UPS (if no UPS, unplug the AS/400 electrical cord). After the electrical work is complete or the natural disaster is over, and power to the building is restored, continue to step 7.

7.

After the power to the building is restored, plug the electrical cord back in the wall outlet for UPS, then power On UPS. If no UPS, plug the electrical cord back in the wall for the AS/400.

8.


9.

Open the control panel door on the AS/400 (right side).

Verify the power light is Off

(light next to the White Power button).

10.

Verify the Mode is set to Normal. To change the Mode, verify the Black Plastic Keylock card key is in the keylock, then press the Mode button until the Normal light is on.

11.

Verify 01 B or 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. • •

12.

13.

If 01 B or 02 B displays, continue to step 12. If 01 B or 02 B does not display, complete the following: a. Press the Mode button until the Manual light is On. b.

Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window.

c.


d.


e.


f.


g.

Press the Mode button until the Manual light is On.


!





16.


2-24


April 2000


Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off These steps are for powering on Black Box 300/500 Series. Follow these steps to IPL the AS/400 when the Power 1.

light is off (possibly due to a power failure).

Open the control panel door on the AS/400 (right side).

Verify the power light is Off (light next to the white Power button). 2.

Verify the Mode is set to Normal. To change the Mode, verify the Black Plastic Keylock card key is in the keylock, then press the Mode button until the Normal light is on.

3.

Verify 01 B or 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. •

If 01 B or 02 B displays, continue to step 4.

•

If 01 B or 02 B does not display, complete the following: a. b. c. d.

Write down the SRC code in the Function/Data window. Press the Mode button until the Manual light is On. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. Press the Enter button.

e.


f.


g. h.

Press the Enter button again. 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. Press the Mode button until the Normal light is On.

4.


5.

!





8.


April 2000


2-25


Forced Power Down These steps are to force a power down for the Black Box Series 300/500. This procedure should only be used if all devices are locked up and/or the amber system attention light is on,

AND

if you are instructed by an EDS Representative. 1.

Open the control panel door (right side).

Verify the power light is On (green light next to the white Power button). 2.

Record any Service Reference Code (SRC) numbers in the Function/Data window or from the system console screen. (The amber system attention light will be on.)

! a.


Verify if any error messages display at the system console.

•

If error messages display, record the information and

immediately inform a

Hardware Specialist. •

If no error messages display at the system console, continue to step 2b.

b. Using the IBM manuals, locate the SRC codes. After reading the description of all steps/procedures are completed. 3.

Verify the Black Plastic Keylock key card is in the keylock.

4.

Change the Mode to Manual by pressing the Mode button until the Manual light is on.

5.

Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window.

6.


7.


8.


9.


10.

Press the white Power button.

!

0

the code, verify

?

If a zero ( ) and a flashing question mark ( ) display on the right side of the Function/Data display,

press the white Power button again.

11. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will increment during the IPL 12.

After the power light goes off, change the Mode back to Normal by pressing the Mode button until the Normal light is on, then follow the instructions to perform an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off.

2-26


April 2000


Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On These steps are for the Black Box Series 300/500. It is recommended an unattended IPL from Power On be performed from the Backup Menu (SAM100), option 2, Backup DEALERLINE Database Power Down System, once a week. The following procedure explains how to perform an unattended (normal) IPL. Complete the following steps to perform an unattended (normal) IPL, if

the AS/400 is already

powered-on: 1. 2.

Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization, for example, MSECOFR. Ensure all users are signed off the system, including SALESLINE users, and no jobs are processing. a.


WRKSBSJOB

QINTER

and press Enter.



WRKSBSJOB

QBATCH

and press Enter.


April 2000


2-27


c.


WRKSBSJOB

DLCOMMSBS



DLCOMMSBS



6=Release

-----Status----ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE

7=Display message



! 3.

F9=Retrieve



Open the control panel door. Verify the Keylock card key is in the keylock.

4.

Verify the Mode is set to Normal. To change the Mode, press the Mode button until the Normal light is on.

5.

Verify 01 B or 02 B displays in the Function/Data window.

2-28

•

If 01 B or 02 B displays, continue to step 6.

•

If 01 B or 02 B does not display, complete the following: a.

Press the Mode button until the Manual light is On.

b.


c.


d.

Press the Select button (Up ↑or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 B displays in the Function/Data window.

e.


f.


g.

Press the Mode button until the Normal light is On.


April 2000


6.


PWRDWNSYS

and press F4.

Depending on the operating system, one of the following Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) screens displays. Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices, press Enter.

How to end . . . . . . . . Delay time, if *CNTRLD . . Restart options: Restart after power down Restart type . . . . . . IPL source . . . . . . . .

*IMMED 3600

*CNTRLD, *IMMED Seconds, *NOLIMIT *NO, *YES *IPLA, *SYS, *FULL *PANEL, A, B, D

*YES *IPLA *PANEL

This screen displays if the operating system is V4R1M0 or higher.

Or Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices, press Enter.

How to end . . . . . . . . Delay time, if *CNTRLD . . Restart after power down IPL source . . . . . . . .

7.


Complete the following:

*IMMED

a.


b.

At the Delay time, if *CNTRLD field, leave the default value 3600.

c.

At the Restart after power down field, type

! 8.


and

*YES

If the operating system is V4R1M0 or higher, the Restart type field will display. *IPLA

d.

At the Restart type field, type

e.

At the IPL source field, leave the default value

f.

Press Enter to begin the power down with restart [IPL]. Leave the terminal powered on.

*PANEL.

The Function Data window displays numbers that will increment during the IPL.

After the IPL is complete (approximately 15 to 30 minutes), a Sign On screen left powered on. 9.

This screen displays if the operating system is V3R7M0 or lower.

displays at all terminals


April 2000


2-29

IPL, POWER UP / DOWN - EXERCISE

IPL, POWER UP / DOWN - EXERCISE 1.

What do the initials "IPL" stand for? _____ _____ _____ _____

2.

A. B. C. D.

To do an unattended IPL, which position should the key be in on the control panel of a C,D,E, or F model? _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

3.

System console Workstation

How often should you IPL your AS/400? _____ _____ _____ _____

2-30

Toggle the power switch on the AS/400 control panel Execute the PWRDWNSYS command with *IMMED option Unplug the AS/400

Identify the terminal to be powered on prior to an IPL: _____ A. _____ B.

6.

True False

If the system needs to be powered down immediately, what is the recommended procedure? _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

5.

Normal Manual Service

You should verify there is no activity on the system before powering down. _____ A. _____ B.

4.

Initiate Power Loss Input Processing Language Initiate People Leaving Initial Program Load

A. B. C. D.

Once a day Once a week Once every two weeks Once a month


April 2000


Solutions to IPL, Power Up / Down - Exercises 1.

D.

2.

A.

3.

A. If you don't, you may lose data.

4.

B.

5.

A.

6.

B. For best performance, complete an IPL weekly. Less often could cause system performance degradation. An IPL should also be completed using the DEALERLINE nightly backup option.

April 2000


2-31



2-32


April 2000

3

Backups Table of Contents

OVERVIEW..................................................................................... 1 TYPES OF BACKUPS .................................................................... 2 DEALERLINE Nightly Backup ....................................................... 2 System Save ................................................................................. 2 MEDIA ........................................................................................... 2 Diskettes........................................................................................ 2 Tape Cartridges............................................................................. 3 CD ROM [Optical Drive]................................................................. 4 Initialize a Tape Cartridge.............................................................. 4 Initialize a Diskette ........................................................................ 7 Display Contents of a CD, Tape Cartridge, or Diskette.................. 8 Troubleshooting............................................................................. 9 DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP............................................... 10 DEALERLINE Nightly Backup – Schedule Start Time ................. 10 DEALERLINE Nightly Backup With Power Down ........................ 16 SYSTEM SAVE............................................................................. 21 Backups - Exercise ..................................................................... 30

April 2000

Backups

3-i

Table of Contents


3-ii


April 2000

OVERVIEW

Backups OVERVIEW DEALERLINE nightly backups and system saves are used for disaster recovery. If there is a fire, a hard drive fails, or any other disaster, your backups are critical to reload all software on your AS/400.

A DEALERLINE nightly backup should be completed each night. A DEALERLINE nightly backup, with a power down should be completed once a week. A System Save should be completed once a month (for example, schedule a system save on the Monday after month end has been completed). A system save should also be completed after loading and applying a DEALERLINE software release, after completing an operating system upgrade, or after any major change to the hardware or software on your system.

April 2000

Backups

3-1

TYPES OF BACKUPS

TYPES OF BACKUPS There are two types of backups – a DEALERLINE Nightly Backup and a System Save.

DEALERLINE Nightly Backup A DEALERLINE Nightly Backup saves all files in DBLIBR (Data Base Library) except for labor time guides (however labor time guides can also be saved if the option to save table data is selected within the DEALERLINE Backup). This DEALERLINE Nightly Backup saves your day-to-day activities.

System Save A System Save saves all files and data, except spool files. All libraries, as well as your dealership's customization, is saved.

MEDIA The type of media used depends on the AS/400 system at the retail facility. Most use tape cartridges for the nightly backup and system save.

! • • • •

•

All AS/400 systems have TAPE DRIVES.

Ivory (Tan) Boxes C-F Models have a diskette drive (no CD drive). Black Box 200 Series very rarely will have a diskette drive (no CD drive). Black Box 300 Series do not have a diskette drive (no CD drive). Black Box 400 and 500 Series do not have a diskette drive; they have a CD ROM drive. The Device ID is OPT01 for the CD ROM drive. Black Box 170, 600, and 700 Series do not have a diskette drive; they have a CD ROM drive. The Device ID is OPT01 for the CD ROM drive.

Diskettes •

5 1/4" Used in C - F Models and 200 Series. High Density, High Capacity Media 1.2 MB Capacity 1024 Byte Format (this is the directory to the diskette)

Or •

8" Used in C - F Models Double-Sided, Double Density Media 1.0 MB Capacity 1024 Byte Format (this is the directory to the diskette) To insert the diskette into the computer, hold the diskette parallel to the ground. Gently push the diskette all the way into the diskette drive (label up), then close the drive door.

3-2


April 2000

MEDIA

Tape Cartridges •

Used in C-F Models and 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, and 170 Series Tape Drive Model 6343

Tape Type Magnus 1.0 Gig DC6525 DC6150 DC6250

Density *DEVTYPE *DEVTYPE 10000 10000

6346

DC6250 DC6150

*DEVTYPE/10000 *DEVTYPE

6347

DC6525 DC6250 DC6150

*DEVTYPE/*QIC525 10000 10000

6348

DC6150/DC6250 DC6525 Magnus 1.0 Gig

10000 *QIC525 *QIC1000/*DEVTYPE

6380

DC6150 DC6250 DC6525 Magnus 1.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig Magnus 2.5 Gig

If 6380 tape drive 10000 and RISC Box 10000 *CTGTYPE is always *QIC525 used for Density. QIC1000 *DEVTYPE/*QIC2GB *DEVTYPE/*QIC2GB

Magnus 4.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig Magnus 2.5 Gig Magnus 1.0 Gig

*CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE

Magnus 13.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig Magnus 2.5 Gig Magnus 1.0


Magnus 25.0 Gig Magnus 16.0 Gig Magnus 13.0 Gig

*CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE

8mm 7mm

*FMT 5GB/*CTGTYPE *FMT 5 GB/*CTGTYPE

2GB tape drive

6382 (63A0) 4 GB tape drive

6385 13 GB tape drive

6386 25GB tape drive Only on RISC box

6390 8mm tape drive

!

CANNOT use 4 Gig tape on a 6385 tape drive. CANNOT use any tape smaller than a 13 Gig to write to (SAVE) on a 6386 tape drive.

RISC Boxes should always use *CTGTYPE as the Tape Density. (170, 500, 600, and 700 Series are RISC Boxes).

The tape type should be listed somewhere on the tape label or the box it was packaged in. To display the tape drive model, at a command line, type WRKDEVD TC and press Enter. Look for type. This is the tape drive model.

April 2000

Backups

3-3

MEDIA

CD ROM [Optical Drive] •

Used in RISC Processors, Models 400, 500, 600, and 170 Series. Unable to save to CDs.

Initialize a Tape Cartridge Tape cartridges must be initialized before performing a daily backup or system save. Before a tape can be used on the AS/400 system it needs to be initialized. The field entries at the Initialize a Tape Screen will vary depending on what the tape is going to be used for. Tapes should be initialized prior to performing a nightly backup, month-end close, or system save.

It is recommended a Magnus 1.0 tape or larger be used for a DEALERLINE nightly backup. You will need to know the Tape Drive Model of the device and the tape drive density. To determine the Tape Drive Model: • Or •

3-4

If the tape drive name is TC, at a command line, type

WRKDEVD

TC

If the tape drive name is T1, at a command line, type

WRKDEVD

T1


and press Enter. and press Enter.

April 2000

MEDIA

To initialize a tape cartridge: 1.

At a command line, type INZTAP

and press Enter.

Initialize Tape (INZTAP) Type choices, press Enter. Tape device ....................... New volume identifier ............. New owner identifier .............. Volume identifier ................. Check for active files ............ Tape density ...................... Code .............................. End of tape option ................ Clear ............................. F3=Exit F5=Refresh F24=More keys

2.

F12=Cancel

TC SAVSYS SAVE *MOUNTED *NO xxxxxx *EBCDIC *REWIND *NO

Name Character value,

*NONE...

Character value, *MOUNTED *YES, *NO, *FIRST *DEVTYPE, *QIC120, *QIC525 *EBCDIC, *ASCII *REWIND, *UNLOAD *NO, *YES

F4=Prompt F13=How to use this display

Complete your field entries with the fields entries in the above example; following are some exceptions and/or considerations: •

Tape device: In most cases, this is TC or T1 for tape cartridge.

•

New volume identifier and New owner identifier fields should describe the information on the tape. For example:

New volume identifier Daily Backup

DBK1

Month End/Year End

HIST

System Save

SAVSYS

Payroll Year End

PAYEND

1099 Year End

AP1099

New owner identifier For system save

SAVE

For anything else

BACKUP or can leave as *BLANK

•

Volume Identifier: Leave the default value *MOUNTED.

•

Check for active files: should be *NO If left at *YES, it will take longer to complete the procedure since it will notify you each time it finds an active file.

April 2000

Backups

3-5

MEDIA

•

Tape density: Use the following chart: For RISC boxes (the Operating System Version is V3R7), the tape Density is always *CTGTYPE (to display the Operating System Version, at a command line type VER).

Tape Drive Model

Tape Type

Density

6343

Magnus 1.0 Gig DC6525 DC6150 DC6250

*DEVTYPE *DEVTYPE 10000 10000

6346

DC6250 DC6150

*DEVTYPE/10000 *DEVTYPE

6347

DC6525 DC6250 DC6150

*DEVTYPE/*QIC525 10000 10000

6348

DC6150/DC6250 DC6525 Magnus 1.0 Gig

10000 *QIC525 *QIC1000/*DEVTYPE

6380

DC6150 DC6250 DC6525 Magnus 1.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig Magnus 2.5 Gig

10000 If 6380 tape drive and RISC Box 10000 *QIC525 *CTGTYPE is always QIC1000 used for Density. *DEVTYPE/*QIC2GB *DEVTYPE/*QIC2GB

Magnus 4.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig Magnus 2.5 Gig Magnus 1.0 Gig


Magnus 13.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig Magnus 2.5 Gig Magnus 1.0


CANNOT use 4 Gig tape on a 6385 tape drive.

Magnus 25.0 Gig Magnus 16.0 Gig Magnus 13.0 Gig

*CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE

CANNOT use any tape smaller than a 13 Gig to write to (SAVE) on a 6386 tape drive.

8mm 7mm

*FMT 5GB/*CTGTYPE *FMT 5 GB/*CTGTYPE

2GB tape drive

6382 (63A0) 4 GB tape drive

6385 13 GB tape drive

6386 25GB tape drive Only on RISC box

6390 8mm tape drive

! 3-6

RISC Boxes should always use *CTGTYPE as the Tape Density. (170, 500, 600, and 700 Series are RISC Boxes).


April 2000

MEDIA •

Code: Leave the default value *EBCDIC.

•

End of tape option: Leave the default value *REWIND.

•

Clear: contains *NO This would be *YES if information had to be cleared; if *YES is entered, it could take up to 4 hours to initialize an 8mm or larger tape.

!

You can protect data on the tape from being written over (write-protect) by turning the small black pin on the front of the tape to the Safe position.

Initialize a Diskette Before using a diskette, it must be initialized, or prepared for use. Most programs and procedures on the AS/400 will automatically initialize media for you. 1. At a command line, type

INZDKT and press F4. Initialize Diskette (INZDKT)

Type choices, press Enter. Diskette device . . . New volume identifier New owner identifier . Diskette format . . . Sector size . . . . . Check for active files Code . . . . . . . . . F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

F5=Refresh

I1 *NONE *BLANK *DATA *STD *NO *EBCDIC F12=Cancel

Name Character value, *NONE *DATA, 1, 2, 2D, *DATA2... *STD, 128, 256, 512, 1024 *YES, *NO *EBCDIC, *ASCII Bottom F13=How to use this display

2. Use the field entries above to make your entries at this screen. Following are some exceptions and/or considerations: •

New volume identifier and the New owner identifier fields should describe the information on the diskette. For example, for saving a Parts file, the New volume identifier could be PARTS. The New owner identifier could be BACKUP, or you could leave the value *BLANK.

•

Diskette format is usually *DATA.

•

Sector size is usually *STD

•

Check for active files should always be *NO. If you specify *YES, you will be notified each time the system finds an active file. If you previously displayed the contents of the diskette, then you are aware its contents.

•

Code is usually *EBCIDIC

April 2000

Backups

3-7

MEDIA

Display Contents of a CD, Tape Cartridge, or Diskette To display the contents of a diskette: 1.

Insert the diskette into the diskette drive. At a command line, type DSPDKT and press F4. Display Diskette (DSPDKT) Type choices, press Enter. Diskette device

. . . . . . . .

Diskette label . . . . . . . . . Data type . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I1 *ALL *LABELS *

Name *LABELS, *SAVRST *, *PRINT

2.

Complete the fields on your screen with the information shown above

3.

Press Enter. The contents of the diskette display.

To display the contents of a tape cartridge: 1.

Insert the tape cartridge into the tape drive. At a command line, type DSPTAP and press F4. Display Tape (DSPTAP) Type choices, press Enter. Tape device

. . . . . . . . . .

Volume identifier

. . . . . . .

File label . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence number Data type

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of tape option . . . . . . .

TC *MOUNTED *ALL_______ 1 *SAVRST * *REWIND

Name Character value, *MOUNTED 1-9999 *LABELS, *SAVRST *, *PRINT *REWIND, *UNLOAD

2. Complete the fields on your screen with the information shown above. 3.

Press Enter. The tape contents displays on the screen.

To display the contents of a CD: 1.

Insert the CD into the CD drive. At a command line, type WRKOPTDIR

2.

The contents of the CD display.

3-8


and press Enter

April 2000

MEDIA

Troubleshooting

•

A common error when initializing a tape is specifying *NONE for Volume identifier; *NONE is not a valid Volume identifier. Verify something is entered at the volume identifier field--it cannot be blank---the system has to know what type of tape is being initialized, again if this tape is going to be used for a backup, system save, etc. Also verify the CORRECT Tape Density is specified--often, these two fields are filled out incorrectly--

•

If the following message displays:

device TC not available

The TC device may have failed. 1.

At a command line type

WRKCFGSTS

*DEV

TC

and press Enter.

The status displays as failed or varied off 2.

If the Status displays Failed, select option #2 to vary the device off, and press Enter.

3.

Press F5 to refresh the screen. The Status must be varied off.

4.

Select option #1 to vary on device--continue to refresh the screen until the status is varied on. If the tape drive does not vary on, call the Customer Support Center.

April 2000

Backups

3-9

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP It is important to complete a DEALERLINE nightly backup each night. The nightly backup also condenses and compresses data files so your system runs efficiently. It is also recommended that once a week you select the option on the Backup Menu to Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System). See the next sub-section, DEALERLINE Nightly Backup With Power Down, for this procedure.

DEALERLINE Nightly Backup – Schedule Start Time You can schedule the DEALERLINE nightly backup to run at a specified time each night, or you can run the backup immediately. (Step 6 contains the instructions to specify a time). Complete the following steps to schedule the DEALERLINE backup to run either at a later time or immediately: 1. If the backup is to be run immediately, verify the system is dedicated. To verify a dedicated system, see the System Save section, step 2 (page 3-16) in this chapter. 2. At a command line, type GO

SAM100 and press Enter.

The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays. SAM100

Backup Menu

Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup)

6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. System Administration Main Menu 90. Sign Off

Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

3. Type 1 Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down), and press Enter.

3-10


April 2000


4. If it has been over one month since the last system save was completed, the File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150512) screen displays: 2/16/00 9:26:02

File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off)

A system save has not been performed since:

SA1505DF SA150512

1/10/00

It is critical to maintain a copy of the current system backup to avoid an interruption in your information processing. In the event of a disaster, your business uses the current backup copy to recover information so that accurate processing can resume in a timely manner. EDS recommends using the following guidelines for your entire system backup: Backup once during each three-month span. Backup before and after an Operating System Upgrade. Backup after every other DEALERLINE Software Update. Do not show me this warning for another month: N

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

This screen reminds you that it has been over one month since your last system save; the date the last system save was completed also displays. Leave the default N at the Do not show me this warning for another month field to keep this as a reminder to complete a System Save, or type Y if you do not want this System Save reminder to display. Press Enter. 5. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150501) screen displays. 2/16/00 9:27:24


SA1505DF SA150501

The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... __ ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

Complete one of the following: •

To save files first, type 1 and press Enter. If your system requires one tape cartridge to complete the backup, or if your system requires 2 tape cartridges and you wait to insert the second tape in the evening, type 1 to save files first.

•

To perform file maintenance first, type 2 and press Enter. If your system uses two tapes for the nightly backup and you insert the second tape in the morning, type 2, to perform file maintenance first.

April 2000

Backups

3-11


6. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150502) screen displays: 2/16/00 9:31:41

SA1505DF SA150502


Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59). Enter your selection PLEASE... 00 00 00

ENTER - Continue

HH - Hours MM - Minutes SS - Seconds

CMD-7 - End of Job

Type the time to begin the nightly backup. • •

To start the backup immediately type zeros in the HH (Hour), MM (Minutes), SS (Seconds) fields. To start the backup at a later time, type the military time in the HH (Hour), MM (Minutes), SS (Seconds) fields. For example, to start the backup at 11:00 p.m., 230000 would be the military time; type 23 at the HH field, 00 at the MM field, and 00 at the SS field. It is helpful to submit your backup to run earlier in the morning, such as 1:00 a.m. so it will not interfere with communications polling.

7. Press Enter. The following window (SA150504) displays: 2/16/00 9:31:56

SA1505DF SA150504

You have scheduled the System Backup at: xx:xx:xx Do you want to continue:

ENTER - Continue

(Y=Yes

N=No)

CMD-7 - End of Job

8. Complete one of the following: •

If the correct time displays, type Y and press Enter. Continue to step 9.

•

To change the time displayed, type N and press Enter to cancel this backup. Resubmit this backup by starting again at step 3.

3-12


April 2000


9. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150503) screen displays. 2/16/00 9:32:00

SA1505DF SA150503


Your system records indicate you backup to

CARTRIDGE

Do you want to backup to a DIFFERENT media this run ? N (The default is NO) Enter Y or N Do you wish to backup System Security and Configuration information ? Y (Valuable if a restore is necessary) Enter Y or N Do you wish to backup table data ? N Enter Y or N (This may require additional tapes)

Backup Device Name

TC ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

Complete the following: a. At the Do you want to backup to a DIFFERENT media this run field, leave the default value N. b. At the Do you wish to backup System Security and Configuration Information field, type Y. c. At the Do you wish to backup table data field: •

Leave the default value N if you DO NOT want to save your labor time guides.

•

Type Y if you want to save your labor time guides. If you are using a 2GB tape or larger, the backup should complete on 1 tape; if you are using a 1GB tape, you may need 2 tapes to complete the backup.

d. At the Backup Device Name, type the tape drive device ID (default value is TC). e. Press Enter. 10. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150510) screen displays: 2/16/00 9:32:45


SA1505DF SA150510

Insert the FIRST tape cartrdige of set "DBK1" in the tape cartridge drive

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

11. Insert the first tape cartridge into the tape drive and press Enter.

April 2000

Backups

3-13


a.

If

the tape cartridge needs to be initialized, the File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150511) screen displays with a prompt to either initialize or remove the tape: 2/16/00 9:34:00

SA1505DF SA1500511


Incorrect Cartridge inserted, check the volumne name. Key Y to iitialize the CARTRIDGE.

Key N if you wish to replace it.

Enter choice here

ENTER - Continue

Y

CMD-7 - End of Job

b. To initialize the tape, type Y and press Enter. Continue to step 12. c. To replace the tape, type N and press Enter. Continue to step d. d. If you typed N to replace the tape, remove the tape and insert the correct one. Begin again at step 10. 12. After the tape is initialized, the following break message displays: Waiting until xx:xx to start the nightly backup 13. Press F3 or Enter to return to the Backup Menu (SAM100). SAM100

Backup Menu



6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. System Administration Main Menu 90. Sign Off

Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

3-14


April 2000


14. To verify the DEALERLINE nightly backup has been scheduled correctly: a. At a command line, type

WRKSBSJOB

QCTL and press Enter.

The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen displays. Work with Subsystem Jobs 02/16/00 Subsystem

. . . . . . . . . . :

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt Job

User

S1020334 09:37:46

QCTL

5=Work with 6=Release 13=Disconnect

7=Display message

Type

-----Status-----

Function

DLBACKUP

SYSADM

BATCH

ACTIVE

DLY-xx:xx:xx

QSYSSCD

QPGMR

BATCH

ACTIVE

PGM-QEZSCNEP

Bottom Parameters or command ===>

b. Verify Job DLBACKUP displays with the Function DLY-xx:xx:xx. (xx:xx:xx is the time the backup was submitted for.) c. Press F3 to exit. d. Sign off the workstation BEFORE the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to begin. 15. If the nightly backup fails, the following message displays when the user that initiated the nightly backup signs on the system the next day:

DEALERLINE file backup has not completed normally. This attempt at backup will end. If this error continues, please contact Customer Support for assistance. JOB xxxxxxx/xxxxxDLBACKUP completed normally on mm/dd/yy at hh:mm:ss The first message means the DEALERLINE backup DID NOT complete normally. The second message means the program DLBACKUP completed normally. Additionally, the following message prints at the system printer: NIGHTLY BACKUP FAILED CALL CUSTOMER

SUPPORT If the nightly backup fails, contact the EDS Customer Support Center.

If the nightly backup completes successfully, the following message prints at the system printer: DEALERLINE Nightly Backup completed normally.

April 2000

Backups

3-15


DEALERLINE Nightly Backup With Power Down A DEALERLINE nightly backup with an automatic Power Down of the system is recommended once a week. When the system is powered back on with an Initial Program Load (IPL), the system and user files/data are condensed making your system run more efficiently. If you have a high percentage of used DASD space, an IPL will help to optimize your system and reduce response time

1. If the backup is to be run immediately, verify the system is dedicated. To verify a dedicated system, see the System Save section, step 2 (page 3-16) in this chapter. 2. At a command line, type GO

SAM100 and press Enter.


Backup Menu



6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. System Administration Main Menu 90. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 2 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

3.

Type 2, Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System), and press Enter.

4.

If it has been over one month since the last system save was completed, the File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150512) screen displays: 2/16/00 9:26:02

File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off)

A system save has not been performed since:

SA1505DF SA150512

1/10/00

It is critical to maintain a copy of the current system backup to avoid an interruption in your information processing. In the event of a disaster, your business uses the current backup copy to recover information so that accurate processing can resume in a timely manner. EDS recommends using the following guidelines for your entire system backup: Backup once during each three-month span. Backup before and after an Operating System Upgrade. Backup after every other DEALERLINE Software Update. Do not show me this warning for another month: N

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

This screen reminds you that it has been over one month since your last system save; the date the last system save was completed also displays. Leave the default N at the Do not show me this warning for another month field to keep this as a reminder to complete a System Save, or type Y if you do not want this System Save reminder to display. Press Enter.

3-16


April 2000


5. The File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150501) screen displays. 2/16/00 9:27:24


SA1505DF SA150501

The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... __ ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job


To save files first, type 1 and press Enter. If your system requires one tape cartridge to complete the backup, or if your system requires 2 tape cartridges and you wait to insert the second tape in the evening, type 1 to save files first.

•

To perform file maintenance first, type 2 and press Enter. If your system uses two tapes for the nightly backup and you insert the second tape in the morning, type 2, to perform file maintenance first.

6. The File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150502) screen displays: 2/17/00 9:31:41


SA1505DF SA150502

Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59). Enter your selection PLEASE... 00 00 00


RESTART system after shutdown

Y – Yes N - No CMD-7 - End of Job

Y

ENTER - Continue

a. Type the time to begin the nightly backup. • •

To start the backup immediately type zeros in the HH (Hour), MM (Minutes), SS (Seconds) fields. To start the backup at a later time, the Start time must be 22:00:00 or later and before 4:00:00 when choosing a file backup and power down. Type the military time in the HH (Hour), MM (Minutes), SS (Seconds) fields. For example, to start the backup at 10:00 p.m., 220000 would be the military time; type 22 at the HH field, 00 at the MM field, and 00 at the SS field. It is helpful to submit your backup to run earlier in the morning, such as 1:00 a.m. so it will not interfere with communications polling.

b. At the RESTART system after shutdown field, type Y to restart the system. If the system is not to be powered up, type N.

April 2000

Backups

3-17


7. Press Enter. The following window displays: 2/16/00 9:31:56

SA1505DF SA150504

You have scheduled the System Backup at: xx:xx:xx Do you want to continue:

ENTER - Continue

(Y=Yes

N=No)

CMD-7 - End of Job

8. Complete one of the following: •

If the correct time displays, type Y and press Enter. Continue to step 9.

•

To change the time displayed, type N and press Enter to cancel this backup. Resubmit this backup by starting again at step 3 (page 16).

9. The File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150503) screen displays. 2/16/00 9:32:00

SA1505DF SA150503


Your system records indicate you backup to

CARTRIDGE

Do you want to backup to a DIFFERENT media this run ? N (The default is NO) Enter Y or N Do you wish to backup System Security and Configuration information ? Y Enter Y or N (Valuable if a restore is necessary) Do you wish to backup table data ? N Enter Y or N (This may require additional tapes)

Backup Device Name

TC ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

Complete the following: a. At the Do you want to backup to a DIFFERENT media this run field, leave the default value N. b. At the Do you wish to backup System Security and Configuration Information field, type Y. c. At the Do you wish to backup table data field:

3-18

•

Leave the default value N if you DO NOT want to save your labor time guides.

•

Type Y if you want to save your labor time guides. If you are using a 2GB tape or larger, the backup should complete on 1 tape; if you are using a 1GB tape, you may need 2 tapes to complete the backup.


April 2000


d. At the Backup Device Name, type the tape drive device ID (default value is TC). e. Press Enter. 10. The File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150510) screen displays: 2/16/00 9:32:45


SA1505DF SA150510

Insert the FIRST tape cartrdige of set "DBK1" in the tape cartridge drive

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

11. Insert the first tape cartridge into the tape drive and press Enter. a. If the tape cartridge needs to be initialized, the File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150511) screen displays with a prompt to either initialize or remove the tape: 2/16/00 9:34:00

SA1505DF SA1500511


Incorrect Cartridge inserted, check the volumne name. Key Y to iitialize the CARTRIDGE.

Key N if you wish to replace it.

Enter choice here

ENTER - Continue

Y

CMD-7 - End of Job

b. To initialize the tape, type Y and press Enter. Continue to step 12. c. To replace the tape, type N and press Enter. Continue to step d. d. If you typed N to replace the tape, remove the tape and insert the correct one. Begin again at step 10. 12. After the tape is initialized, the following break message displays: Waiting until xx:xx to start the nightly backup 13. Press F3 or Enter to return to the Backup Menu (SAM100).

April 2000

Backups

3-19


14. To verify the DEALERLINE nightly backup has been scheduled correctly: a. At a command line, type

WRKSBSJOB

QCTL and press Enter.

The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen displays. Work with Subsystem Jobs 02/16/00 Subsystem

. . . . . . . . . . :

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt Job

5=Work with 6=Release 13=Disconnect

User

S1020334 09:37:46

QCTL 7=Display message

Type

-----Status-----

Function

DLBACKUP

SYSADM

BATCH

ACTIVE

DLY-xx:xx:xx

QSYSSCD

QPGMR

BATCH

ACTIVE

PGM-QEZSCNEP


F9=Retrieve


b. Verify Job DLBACKUP displays with the Function DLY-xx:xx:xx. (xx:xx:xx is the time the backup was submitted for.) c. Press F3 to exit. d. Sign off the workstation BEFORE the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to begin. 15. If the nightly backup fails, the following message displays when the user that initiated the nightly backup signs on the system the next day:

DEALERLINE file backup has not completed normally. This attempt at backup will end. If this error continues, please contact Customer Support for assistance. JOB xxxxxxx/xxxxxDLBACKUP completed normally on mm/dd/yy at hh:mm:ss The first message means the DEALERLINE backup DID NOT complete normally. The second message means the program DLBACKUP completed normally. Additionally, the following message prints at the system printer: NIGHTLY BACKUP FAILED CALL CUSTOMER

SUPPORT If the nightly backup fails, contact the EDS Customer Support Center.

If the nightly backup completes successfully, the following message prints at the system printer: DEALERLINE Nightly Backup completed normally.

3-20


April 2000

SYSTEM SAVE

SYSTEM SAVE A system save must be performed after loading any software or completing any hardware upgrade. A system save should be completed once a month. A system save is used for disaster recovery. If there is a fire, a hard drive fails, or any other disaster, the system save is critical to reload all software on your AS/400. The system save tape cartridge(s) must be stored in a safe place.

The System Save can be set up for delayed-time processing. These instructions are divided into two sections: The steps in the Before Beginning the System Save section do not require a dedicated system and can be completed during business hours. The steps in the Begin the System Save section require a dedicated system (no jobs can be processing and all users must be signed off the system, including SALESLINE users) and takes approximately 2 to 3 hours to complete.

April 2000

Backups

3-21

SYSTEM SAVE

Before Beginning the System Save You will need 1 to 2 tape cartridges that can be initialized for a system save. The number of tape cartridges needed depends on the type of tape cartridge you are using (which depends on your AS/400 model type) and the size of your system. Steps 1 through 4 can be completed during business hours.

1.

Clean the tape drive to prevent tape errors during the system save procedure.

2.

Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your user ID.

3.

Complete the following steps to initialize 1 to 2 tape cartridges: a. Insert a tape cartridge into the tape drive. b. At a command line, type INZTAP and press F4. The Initialize Tape (INZTAP) screen displays. Initialize Tape (INZTAP) Type choices, press Enter. Tape device

. . . . . . . . . .

New volume identifier

. . . . .

TC SAVSYS SAVE

New owner identifier . . . . . . Volume identifier . . . . . . .

*MOUNTED

Check for active files . . . . .

*NO

Tape density . . . Code . . . . . . . End of tape option Clear . . . . . .

*EBCDIC *REWIND *NO

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

*xxxxx

Name Character value, *NONE... Character value, *MOUNTED *YES, *NO, *FIRST *DEVTYPE, *QIC120, *QIC525... *EBCDIC, *ASCII *REWIND, *UNLOAD *NO, *YES

c. At the Tape device field, type the device name of your tape drive (TC or T1) and press Field Exit. d. At the New volume identifier field, in place of the default value, type SAVSYS e. At the New owner identifier field, in place of the default value, type SAVE and press Field Exit. f.

At the Volume identifier field, leave the default value *MOUNTED

g. At the Check for active files field, type *NO and press Field Exit.

3-22


April 2000

SYSTEM SAVE

Before Beginning the System Save (continued)

h. At the Tape density field, type the correct tape density for your system (for example, type *DEVTYPE, 10000, *QIC525, *QIC1000, *QIC2GB, *FMT5GB, *FMT7GB, or *CTGTYPE) and press Field Exit.

!

If you have a

RISC

processor, (Operating System is V3R7M0 or higher) the Tape Density should be *CTGTYPE

i.

At the Code field, leave the default value *EBCDIC

j.

At the End of tape option, leave the default value *REWIND

k. At the Clear field, type *NO l.

Press Enter. After the tape is initialized, the following message displays: Volume SAVSYS prepared for operation with owner id SAVE

!

If you have more tapes to initialize: Ensure all tapes are the same size/length if you are using more than one tape for the system save. - Remove the tape cartridge and insert the next tape to initialize. - Press F9 to display the initialization command at the command line. - Press Enter. - Repeat this procedure until there are no more tapes to initialize.

4. Sign off the system.

April 2000

Backups

3-23

SYSTEM SAVE

Begin the System Save

! 1.

Make sure to perform a screen print(s) of the Software Version screen (step 16) when the System Save is complete.

Sign on to the system console using

QSECOFR

as the user ID.

Be sure to use QSECOFR – this is the only profile created during a reload if your system has to be reloaded from a System Save.

!

If you are scheduling the system save to process at a later time, skip step 2 and continue to step 3.

2. Ensure your system is dedicated (all users must be signed off the system, including SALESLINE users, and no jobs can be processing). a. At a command line, type

WRKSBSJOB

QINTER and press Enter.

The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). If any jobs display, have the corresponding user(s) sign off the system. Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). b. At a command line, type

WRKSBSJOB

QBATCH

and press Enter.

The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). If any jobs display, wait until they complete before continuing. Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). c. At a command line, type

WRKSBSJOB

DLCOMMSBS and press Enter.

Work with Subsystem Jobs Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .: DLCOMMSBS Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt

JobJob POLLDCS GMXS_SVR POLLDCS POLLPREP POLLPREP POLLRAPID POLLRAPID

Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt

!


User MSECOFR

Type BATCH

MSECOFR

BATCH

MSECOFR

BATCH

MSECOFR

BATCH

F5=Refresh

S1025232

6=Release

7=Display message

-----Status-----Function Function PGM ACTIVE -CDPOLLCL PGM-CA4000CL PGM-CDPOLLCL DLYACTIVE 16:30:00 DLY-16:30:00 PGM -CRPOLLCL ACTIVE PGM-CRPOLLCL PGM-CRPOLLCL ACTIVE

F9=Retrieve



3-24


April 2000

SYSTEM SAVE

3. If you are scheduling your system save to process at a later time, or are submitting the system save now, but will not be staying on-site while the system save processes, complete this step to verify (and if necessary, change) the system value for QINACTITV. If you are NOT scheduling your system save to process at a later time, and will be staying on-site until the system save completes, skip this step and continue to step 4. To schedule the system save to process at a later time, set the system value QINACTITV to *NONE: a. At a command line, type DSPSYSVAL QINACTITV and press Enter. The Display System Value screen displays. Display System Value System value ......................... : Description ............................ :

QINACTITV Inactive job time-out

Time-out interval in minutes ........................... :

*NONE

*NONE, 5-300

Press Enter to continue. F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

b. If *NONE displays at the Time-out interval in minutes field, press F3 to exit and continue to step 4.

c. If any other value displays at the Time-out interval in minutes field, complete the following steps to change the value in this field: -

Make a note of the current value; at the end of the system save process (step 14), you will need to change this field back to its original value. Press F3 to exit.

-

At a command line, type CHGSYSVAL QINACTITV '*NONE' and press Enter.

-

Verify the system value has been changed: At a command line, type DSPSYSVAL QINACTITV and press Enter. The Time-out interval in minutes field should be *NONE. ♦ If *NONE displays, press F3 to exit and continue to step 4. ♦

4.

If *NONE does not display, press F3 to exit and repeat step c.

If your system console is a 3488 or 3489 (base is 1-inch high and square) make sure Auto Disconnect (Power Saver) is set to No: a.

Press Set-up (lower left of the keyboard). Press the Arrow key to Setup Display (on-line) and press Enter. Press F8 to display the next screen. The last option is Auto Disconnect or Power Saver.

b.

If No is highlighted, continue

c.

If No is not highlighted, press the Arrow keys to position the cursor on No and press the Space

to step d.

bar to change the option to No. d.

Press F3 two times to exit and return to a command line.

April 2000

Backups

3-25

SYSTEM SAVE

5.

At a command line, type DSPMSG QSYSOPR and press Enter. Press F16 to erase all unanswered messages.

!

If any messages are not deleted, take the appropriate action to clear the messages. Press F3 or Enter to exit.

6. Insert the first initialized System Save tape cartridge into the tape drive. 7. At a command line, type GO SAVE and press Enter. The Save Menu displays. Save Select one of the following: Save Data 1. Files 2. Libraries 3. Documents and folders 4. Programs 5. Other Objects 6. Changed objects only 7. Licensed programs 8. Security data 9. Storage 10. Configuration 11. Objects in directories Selection or command ==>__________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Additional Asst. F16=AS/400 Main menu (c) Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 1995.

8. Press the Shift and Arrow keys at the same time to display option 21, Entire System. Save Select one of the following: Save System and User Data 21. Entire System 22. System data only 23. All user data Save Document Library Objects 30. All documents, folders, and mail 31. New and changed documents, new folders, all mail 32. Documents and folders 33. Mail only 34. Calendars

Selection or command

21

==> _______________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Additional Asst. F16=AS/400 Main menu (c) Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 1995.

9. Type 21, Entire System, and press Enter.

An informational screen displays. Press Enter.

3-26


April 2000

SYSTEM SAVE

10. The Specify Command Defaults screen displays. Specify Command Defaults Type choices, press Enter. Tape devices .................................................................... TC

Names

Prompt for commands ...................................................... N

Y=Yes, N=No

Check for active files......................................................... N

Y=Yes, N=No

Message queue delivery ...................................................

*NOTIFY

*Break, *Notify

Start Time.......................................................................... 020000

*Current, Time

Vary off network servers ................................................... *NONE

*NONE, *ALL, *LANSERVER. *NETWARE, *BASE, *AIX, *WINDDWSNT

F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

This field displays only if the Operating System is V4R2M0 or higher.

a. At the Tape devices field, type the name of your tape drive (TC or T1) and press Field Exit. b. At the Prompt for commands field, type N c. At the Check for active files field, type N d. At the Message queue delivery field, type *NOTIFY e. At the Start Time field, complete one of the following: - To start the system save immediately, type *CURRENT and press Enter. Continue to step h.

Or - To start the system save at a specific time, type the time you want the system save to start using military time (HHMMSS). For example, 11:00 p.m. would be typed 230000 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 020000. (Do NOT type * when typing a specific time). Press Field Exit after typing a time.

f. If the Operating System is V4R2M0 or higher, the Vary off network servers field displays - leave the default value *NONE. g. Press Enter. After several minutes, the following message displays at the bottom of the screen: Save submitted at HH:MM:SS. Save will start at HH:MM:SS h.

The screen will remain locked until the System Save has completed.

Informational messages display at the bottom of the screen approximately 20 minutes after the save has started.

Press the Space bar to display this screen ONLY IF your screen becomes dim or blank.

April 2000

Backups

3-27

SYSTEM SAVE

11. If a second tape cartridge is needed, the following message displays at the bottom of the screen: Waiting for reply to message on message queue QSYSOPR a.

Press the Shift and SysRq keys at the same time. When the dash line displays at the bottom of the screen, type 6 and press Enter.

b.

Insert the second tape cartridge into the tape drive.

c.

Respond to the Load next tape volume on device TC (C G) prompt with a G and press Enter two times to return to the Specify Command Defaults screen.

!

If Load next tape volume on device TC message does not display, press F16 to delete all unanswered messages; Load next tape volume on device TC message should now display. Return to step 11c.

12. When the system save is complete, the Save menu displays. Ensure the following message displays at the bottom of the screen:

!

Save or restore option completed successfully

If a message displays that indicates all objects were NOT saved, call the EDS Customer Support Center, prompt 4.

13. Sign off the system console, then sign back on to the system console using MSECOFR as the user ID. 14. If the system value QINACTITV was changed to *NONE in step 3, change it back to its original value: At a command line, type CHGSYSVAL QINACTITV 'nn' and press Enter. nn=the original Time-out interval in minutes value, for example 60, 90, or 120. 15. If your system console is a 3488 or 3489 (base is 1-inch high and square) and Auto Disconnect (Power Saver) was set to Yes prior to the system save, you can now change this back to Yes: a. Press Set-up (lower left of the keyboard). Press the Arrow key to Setup Display (online) and press Enter. Press F8 to display the next screen. The last option is Auto Disconnect or Power Saver. b.

If Yes is highlighted, continue

to step d.

c.

If Yes is not highlighted, press the Arrow keys to position the cursor on Yes and press the Space bar to change the option to Yes.

d. Press F3 two times to exit and return to a command line.

3-28


April 2000

SYSTEM SAVE

16. Print the current software release and operating system version:

a. At a command line, type VER and press Enter. b. Press Print. When the following message displays: Print operation complete to the default printer device file

Press Reset. c. Press F3 to return to a command line. d. The print screen prints at the default printer. e. Respond to any messages or printer messages appropriately. 17. Be sure to label each tape with the sequence in which it was used (for example 1 of 2, 2 of 2). 18. Store the print screen of the current software release and operating system version with the system save tape(s) in a safe place. 19. Sign off the system console.

April 2000

Backups

3-29

Backups - Exercise

Backups - Exercise 1.

An ATF is an Application Temporary Fix to the DEALERLINE software. _____ True _____ False

2.

What type of backup should be done after loading a DEALERLINE Software Update? _____ _____ _____ _____

3.

A. B. C. D.

A few files DEALERLINE Nightly Libraries System

All subsystems should be ended prior to performing a DEALERLINE nightly backup. _____ True _____ False

4.

When displaying a diskette or tape contents, which value for the data type field must be specified to display object names, save dates, etc.? _____ A. _____ B.

5.

A System Save should be performed: _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

6.

*LABELS *SAVRST

Nightly Yearly Monthly, or after a DEALERLINE Software Update is loaded

Identify the command to execute the following: Display a CD Display a Diskette Initialize a Diskette Display a Tape Initialize a Tape Save the System

7.

____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

What command should you use to determine the type of tape drive on the system? ________________________________

Backups – Exercise Solutions 1.

True.

2.

D. System Save.

3.

False. (If the backup is being started immediately, verify there is no activity on the system.)

4.

B. *SAVRST.

3-30


April 2000

Backups - Exercise

5.

C. Monthly, or after a DEALERLINE Software Update is loaded

6.

WRKOPTDIR DSPDKT DSPTAP INZDKT INZTAP GO SAVE

7.

WRKDEVD TC

April 2000

or

WRKDEVD T1

or

WRKDEVD T*

Backups

3-31

Backups - Exercise


3-32


April 2000

4

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Updates Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 1 ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)........................... 2 Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup........... 8 SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE ..................... 14 LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES EXERCISE .................................................................................. 26

April 2000

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-i

Table of Contents

4-ii


April 2000

OVERVIEW

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update OVERVIEW Software updates are enhancements and fixes to the DEALERLINE software. These are sent periodically and should be loaded and applied to your system soon after you receive it. You will receive software updates either electronically [Electronic Object Distribution (EOD)], or on a tape cartridge. With each type of update, Software Update Instructions are sent, along with color-coded packets explaining the enhancement to each applicable DEALERLINE application. The Software Update Instructions in this guide are generic – the set of instructions you receive with each release contain specific instructions, such as checking for a specific operating system and release dependency (dependency will vary with each software update) before loading and applying the software. Any Pre-Update (specific items or conditions to verify before loading the software) and any Post-Update instructions (specific items or conditions to verify after loading the software) are included with the Software Update Instructions. In this guide, replace xxxx with the actual DEALERLINE Base Release and Product Release.

April 2000


4-1

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) Software releases are automatically sent to your AS/400 system using the Electronic Object Distribution (EOD) process. After the release is sent to your system, RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release) displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen (xxxx=DEALERLINE software release). •

RELxxxxRGA displays for RISC systems – operating system is V3R7 or higher

•

RELxxxxGA displays for NON-RISC systems – operating system is V3R2

The release will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup, after selecting the release on the Work With EOD Objects screen. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections: Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in the Before You Begin section anytime during business hours, one to two days before you plan to apply this release. ⇒ While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen, you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. See step 1, page 4-3.

Apply the Release and Set Nightly Backup ⇒ Complete the steps in this section when you are ready to apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup. ⇒ DEALERLINE software releases usually take 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply (not including the nightly backup).

A System Save should be completed within 5 days after a DEALERLINE software update is successfully applied to your system (see the Backups chapter).

4-2


April 2000


Before You Begin Step 1 is optional and may be completed anytime during business hours.

1. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in this release: You may skip this step and continue to step 2. a.

Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup.

b.

Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). DMM000

DEALERLINE

XL

Main

Menu



23.

DEALERLINE XL Version

90.

Sign Off


6

===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant

c.

F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=AS/400 main menu

Type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. The System Administration Main Menu (DMM005) displays. DMM005

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu

Select one of the following: 1. Backups 2. Communications 3. Security 5. Restore 6. Labels 7. Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments 8. Forms Formatting 9. Print Work-Station Printer Assignments 11. Name and Address Menu 13. Reset Remote Dial Connection

23. DEALERLINE Main Menu 24. Sign Off

Selection or command ===>

1

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

d.

Type 1, Backups, and press Enter.

February 2000


4-3


The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays. SAM100 Backup Menu Select one of the following: 1. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) 2. Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) 3. Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) 4. Power Down System (No Backup) 6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects

23. System Administration Main Menu 24. Sign Off

Selection or command ===> 7 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

e.

Type 7, Work With EOD Objects, and press Enter. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092

8/04/97 11:57:35

Work With EOD Objects More:

Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print X=Select Opt

5

• •

f.

U=Unselect

Name

Description

RELxxxxRGA

Release x.x.xx

F1=Help

F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

+

PgUp

Status

Type *RELEASE

PgDn

If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher, RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0, RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column.

Complete one of the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA: •

To display the list, type 5 and press Enter. While the list displays, use Pg Up/Dn keys to display the next/previous screen. Press F3 to return to the Work With EOD Objects screen.

Or •

4-4

To print the list, type

6

and press Enter. The list prints at the system printer.

g.

Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays.

h.

Sign off the system.


April 2000


Steps 2 through 4 in this section may be completed anytime during business hours, 1 - 2 days before beginning the steps in the Apply the Release and Set Nightly Backup. 2. Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL and Product Release levels: a.

Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup.

b.

At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The Software Version screen displays:

c.

Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4.4.

Base

If any other value displays, do not load this software; press F3 to return to a command line. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1).

3.

d.

Under the Description column, locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release; see the Software Update Instructions for the specific release). If necessary, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1).

e.

Press F3 to exit.

For the EOD application process to work correctly, the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. To verify the user ID has these authorities: a.

Sign onto the system using

MSECOFR

as your user ID.

In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b.


February 2000

WRKUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press Enter.


4-5


The Work with User Profiles screen displays. Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner Opt --__

User Profile ------SMITH

Text ----------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys

c.

F17=Position to

Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (profile). Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner

Opt ---

5


Text ------------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level

d.

4-6

F16=Repeat position to F24=More keys

F17=Position to

At the Opt field, type 5, Display, and press Enter.


April 2000


The Display User Profile – Basic screen displays. Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. Display User Profile - Basic 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner User profile........................................................ : SMITH User Opt Profile --- -------

5

SMITH

Previous sign-on ............................................... : 11/16/98 08:34:24 Sign-on attempts not valid ................................ : 0 .......................................................................... : *ENABLED Date password last changed ............................. : 08/31/98 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Michelle D. Kalich, CST Password expiration interval ............................. : 180 Date password expires.................................... : 02/27/99 Set password to expired.................................... : *NO User class......................................................... : *USER

Text

Special authority ................. : *ALLOBJ *IOSYSCFG Bottom *SECADM

Parameters for options 1, 2,Group 3, 4 and 5 or command profile..................................................... : QPGMR ===> Owner............................................................... : *USRPRF Group authority ................................................. : *NONEto F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F17=Position type keys ......................................... : *PRIVATE F21=Select assistance levelGroup authority F24=More Supplemental groups ........................................ : Assistance level ................................................ :

*NONE *SYSVAL

More...

e.

Verify the values *ALLOBJ

*IOSYSCFG and *SECADM are listed in the Special Authority field.

•

If the values are listed, press F3 to exit. Skip the rest of this step and continue to step 4.

•

If any of the values are not listed, press F3 to exit and complete the following: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx

f.


CHGUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press F4.

g.

Press F10 for additional parameters.

h.

Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field.

i.

At the Special Authority field, locate the last line of authority, type + and press the Space Bar once, then press Enter.

j.

The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays.

k.

In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field, type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM.

l.

Press Enter twice.

m. One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen, (substitute user ID for xxxxx). User Profile xxxxx Changed. Or

User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values. These are informational messages. If any other message displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). n.

After a user profile is changed, the user must sign off, then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect.

o.

Continue to step 4.

February 2000


4-7


4.

Complete the following to initialize tapes for the DEALERLINE nightly backup: a. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup. b.

Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup.

EDS recommends initializing two tapes as a precaution. If you are prompted for a second tape during this procedure, and one is not available, the backup must be canceled and restarted from the beginning. c.


Your system is ready for the release to be applied as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup. 5.

Verify any Pre-Update Instructions are complete.

Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run, it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches, only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. Verify any Pre-Update Procedures/Instructions are completed by the appropriate department. If you have questions, please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323, weekdays 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. and Saturday 9 a.m. to 9 p.m. (EST). After listening to the prompts, select the appropriate application.

4-8


April 2000


1. Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. 2.

Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100). To display the Backup Menu: •

From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000), type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. From the System Administration Main Menu (DMM005), type 1, Backups, and press Enter.

Or •

At a command line, type GO SAM100 and press Enter. SAM100

Backup Menu

Select one of the following: 1. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) 2. Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) 3. Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) 4. Power Down System (No Backup) 6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects



1


3.

Type

1,

Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down), and press Enter.

February 2000


4-9


The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays. SA155201 QPADEV0092

8/04/97 11:57:35



X

+

U=Unselect

Name

Description

RELxxxxRGA

Release x.x.xx

Status

Type *RELEASE

F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn

If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher, RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0 RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. 4.

To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup, ensure an X displays under the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA. (If necessary, type X to Select the release.) If you press Enter at this screen with the release Selected (X under the Opt field next to the release), the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup. If you need to Unselect the release (the release will not apply as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup), type U under the Opt column, next to the release Name and press Enter. The Work With EOD screen and the release will display again when you set up the next DEALERLINE nightly backup; it will continue to display until you Select (X) for the release to apply.

5.

Press Enter again to exit this screen. The system performs a series of edits to ensure the release can be applied to your system; this may take a few minutes.

4-10


April 2000


The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays. 8/04/97 12:22:09

A1505DF SA150501


The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... 2 ENTER - Continue

6.

Type

2

CMD-7 - End of Job

and press Enter.

It is recommended that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first, especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. The release will be applied before saving the data files. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays. 8/04/97 12:30:40


SA1505DF SA150502

Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE:

The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59).

Enter your selection PLEASE... 00 00 00

ENTER - Continue

7.


CMD-7 - End of Job

Type the time you would like the DEALERLINE nightly backup and release to begin. For example 10:00 p.m. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 02 00 00. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. Press Enter to continue.

8.

Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a DEALERLINE nightly backup. After completing step 8, the remaining steps can be completed the next morning.

February 2000


4-11


9.

After the backup completes, the following information prints:

UPGRADE started for release xxxx. Release xxxx applied successfully. If any other information prints, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1) immediately.

!

The next time you sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup, messages about the status of the software update display as part of the sign on messages. Please read these messages to make sure the software update completed successfully.

10. Sign onto the system console using

4-12

MSECOFR

as your user ID.


April 2000


11.


VER

and press Enter.

The following screen displays: SA0711DF QPADEV0092

Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display

DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4.4 Creation Date . . . . . : 10/26/94 Load Date . . . . . . . : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release

4590

a.

*ALL

Product Code

DL

Operating System Release : VxRxM0

Code, *ALL Creation Date

2/04/00 15:13:34

PTF Information: *NO *YES, *NO

Load Date

xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99

More: + Description

1999 BUSINESSLINE YEAR eND

4582

DL

xx/xx/99

xx/xx/99

PARTSLINE ENHANCEMENTS

4580

DL

xx/xx/99

xx/xx/99

DEALERLINE 1999 RELASE TWO

4572

DL

XX/XX/99

XX/XX/99

4570

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/99

DEALERLINE 1999 RELEASE ONE

4565

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/99

COMMON DELIVERY REPORTING

SATURN LS MODEL UPDATE

4562

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/98

GM STOCKING GUIDE UPDATE

4560

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/98

1998 BUSINESSLINE YEAR END

4550

DL

xx/xx/98

xx/xx/98

DEALERLINE 1998 RELEASE TWO

On the first detail line, under the Description column locate the Description of the new software; ensure the new Product Release code displays under the Product Release column. In this example, 4590 is the new Product Release, and the Description of the new software is 1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End. If any other value displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center.

b.

Press F3 to return to a command line.

12.

After applying this release, complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before completing a system save.

13.

After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally, complete a System Save.

You can set up the System Save for Delayed-Time processing (see the System Save Instructions). The System Save should be completed within 5 days after loading the release. Make sure the screen print of the Software Version Display screen is stored with the system save tape(s). 14. Ensure any Post-Update Procedures/Instructions are completed by the appropriate department.

February 2000


4-13

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The following instructions are to load and apply the software update from a tape cartridge. These instructions are generic. Each software update is identified by a Base Release and a Product Release number. In these instructions, xxxx represents the DEALERLINE Product Release number, for example, 4590. Each software release will first require your operating system version and DEALERLINE software Product Release to be at a specific version or release. (See the following section, Before You Begin, step 2.) Additionally, some releases require Pre-Update and/or Post-Update Instructions be completed before or after loading the software update. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections:

• Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in this section, anytime during business hours, 1 to 2 days before you plan to apply this release. ⇒ Step 4, page 4-18, contains the instructions to restore the release from the tape cartridge to your system. If this step is not completed, the release will not load. After this step is complete, RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release) displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen when you set up your DEALERLINE nightly backup. •


•


⇒ The release is restored in a Selected status and will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup unless you Unselect it (see step 4, page 22, in the Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup section). While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen, you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. See step 7, page 4-19, in this section for instructions.

• Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup ⇒ Complete the steps in this section when you are ready to apply the release to your system as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup. ⇒ DEALERLINE software releases usually take 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply (not including the DEALERLINE nightly backup). ⇒ The System Save Instructions should be completed within 5 days after a DEALERLINE software update is successfully applied to your system (see the Backups chapter).

4-14


April 2000


Before You Begin

Steps 1 through 7 may be completed anytime during business hours, 1 - 2 days before beginning the steps in Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup. 1.

Clean the tape drive to prevent tape drive errors from occurring during this procedure.

2. Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL and Product Release levels: a.

Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your User ID.

b.

At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The Software Version screen displays.

SA0711DF QPADEV0092

4.4


DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4.4 Creation Date . . . . . : 10/26/94 Load Date . . . . . . . : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product 4590

Release

c.

*ALL

Date

2/04/00 15:13:34 V3R2M0 Operating System Release : VxRxM0

Code, *ALL


Productxx/xx/99 Creation xx/xx/99 Load DL Code

Base

Date

XX/XX/99

More: 1999 BUSINESSLINE YEAR END

4582

DL

XX/XX/98

4580

DL

xx/xx/99

4572

DL

XX/XX/99

XX/XX/99

4570

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/99


4565

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/99


xx/xx/99

PARTSLINE ENHANCEMENTS DEALERLINE 1999 RELASE TWO SATURN LS MODEL UPDATE

4562

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/98


4560

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/98


4550

DL

xx/xx/98

xx/xx/98

+

Description


Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4.4. If any other value displays, do not load this software; press F3 to return to a command line. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1).

d.

Under the Description column, locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release; see the Software Update Instructions for the specific release). If necessary, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1).

e.

Press F3 to exit.

February 2000


4-15


3.

For the EOD application process to work correctly, the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. To verify the backup user ID has these authorities: a.

Sign onto the system using

MSECOFR

as your user ID.

In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b.


WRKUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press Enter.





c.

F17=Position to

Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (user profile). Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner

Opt ---

5




d.

4-16


F17=Position to

At the Opt field, type 5, Display, and press Enter.


April 2000


The Display User Profile – Basic screen displays. Display User Profile - Basic User profile ................. : SMITH Previous sign-on ............ : Sign-on attempts not valid .. : ............................. : Date password last changed .. : Password expiration interval : Date password expires ..... : Set password to expired ..... : User class .................. :

11/16/98 0 *ENABLED 08/31/98 180 02/27/99 *NO *USER

08:34:24

Special authority : *ALLOBJ ....... *IOSYSCFG *SECADM Group profile ................ : Owner ....................... : Group authority ............. : Group authority type ........ : Supplemental groups ......... : Assistance level ............ :

QPGMR *USRPRF *NONE *PRIVATE *NONE *SYSVAL More...

Press Enter to continue. F3=Exit F12=Cancel

e. Verify the values *ALLOBJ

*IOSYSCFG and *SECADM are listed in the Special Authority field.

• If the values are listed, press F3 to exit. Skip the rest of this step and

continue to step 4. • If any of the values are not listed, press F3 to exit and continue to step f: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup in place of xxxxx f.


CHGUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press F4.

g.

Press F10 for additional parameters.

h.

Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field.

i.

At the Special Authority field, locate the last line of authority, type + and press the Space Bar once, then press Enter.

j.

The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays.

k.

In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field, type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM.

l.

Press Enter twice.

m. One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen, (substitute User Profile xxxxx Changed.

user ID for xxxxx).

Or

User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values. These are informational messages. If any other message displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). n.

After a user profile is changed, the user must sign off, then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect.

o.

Continue to step 4.

February 2000


4-17


4.

This step copies the release onto your system from the tape cartridge. You will need to select the release from the Work With EOD Objects screen which displays when you set up your next DEALERLINE nightly backup. This step should take 30 minutes or less to complete and does

not require a dedicated system.

a.

Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. (This user ID has authority to DEALERLINE libraries.)

b.

Insert the Base Release x.x, Product Release xx tape cartridge into the tape drive.

c.

At a command line type

LODRUN

TC

and press Enter.

Informational messages display. When the following message displays:

1 Release Restored and 1 Release Scheduled to be applied during your Nightly Backup The release is successfully restored to your system and will now display as either RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release – Non-RISC or RISC) on the Work With EOD Objects screen.

5.

d.

Remove the tape from the tape drive.

e.

Continue to step 5.

Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup.

! 6.

EDS recommends initializing two tapes as a precaution. If you are prompted for a second tape during this procedure, and one is not available, the backup must be canceled and restarted from the beginning.


Your system is ready for the release to be applied as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup.

4-18


April 2000


Step 7 may be completed anytime, as long as the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. 7.

If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in this release:

! a.

This step is optional.

Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup.

b. Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000); continue to step c. Or Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100); at a command line, type GO then continue to step e. DMM000

DEALERLINE

XL

Main

SAM100 and press Enter,

Menu



23.


90.

Sign Off

Selection or command 6 ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant

c.


Type 6, System Administration, and press Enter.

The System Administration Main Menu (DMM005) displays. DMM005


Select one of the following: 1. Backups 2. Communications 3. Security 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work-Station Printer Assignments

11. Name and Address Menu 13. Reset Remote Dial Connection



d.

Type 1, Backups, and press Enter

February 2000


4-19



Backup Menu



6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. System Administration Main Menu 24. Sign Off Selection or command 7 ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

e.

Type 7, Work With EOD Objects, and press Enter. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092 More: + Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt

5

Name

F3=Exit

X=Select

U=Unselect

Description

RELxxxxRGA

F1=Help

8/04/97 11:57:35

Work With EOD Objects

Status

Release x.x.xx

F12=Cancel

PgUp

Type *RELEASE

PgDn

•

If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher, RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column.

•

If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0, RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column.

f.

Complete one of the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA: •

To display the list, type 5 and press Enter. While the list displays, use Pg Up/Down keys to display the next/previous screen. Press F3 to return to the Work With EOD Objects screen.

•

To print the list, type

6

and press Enter. The list prints at the system printer.

g.

Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays.

h.


4-20


April 2000


Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run, it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches, only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. If you have questions, please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323, weekdays 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. and Saturday 9 a.m. to 9 p.m. (EST). After listening to the prompts, select the appropriate application. 1.

Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEAQLERLINE nightly backup.

2.

Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100):

•


Or •


Backup Menu




3.

Type 1, Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down), and press Enter.

February 2000


4-21


The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays. S155201 QPADEV0092

8/04/97 11:57:35


More: Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt X

F1=Help

4.

Name RELxxxxRGA

F3=Exit

X=Select

Description

Status

Type

RELEASE

*SELECTED

*RELEASE

x.x.xx

F12=Cancel

PgUp

+

U=Unselect

PgDn

•


•


To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup: (If *SELECTED DOES NOT display as the Status, type X at the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA.) Press Enter (with an X at the Opt field) - the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup.

! 5.

To Unselect the release (the release will not apply as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup), type U under the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA and press Enter. If you typed U to Unselect the release, the Work With EOD screen and the release will display again, each day, when you set up your nightly backup; it will continue to display until you Select (X) for the release to apply.

Press Enter again to exit this screen.

!

4-22

The system performs a series of edits to ensure the release can be applied to your system; this may take a few minutes.


April 2000



A1505DF SA150501


The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... ENTER - Continue

2 CMD-7 - End of Job

EDS recommends that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first, especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. The release will be applied before saving the data files. 6.

Type

2

and press Enter.



SA1505DF SA150502

Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59). Enter your selection PLEASE

ENTER - Continue

7.

00 00 00


CMD-7 - End of Job

Type the time you would like the nightly backup and release to begin. For example, 10:00 p.m. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 02 00 00. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 2 to 4 hours to apply. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. Press Enter to continue.

February 2000


4-23


8.

Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a backup. After completing step 8, the remaining steps can be completed the next morning.

9.

After the backup completes, the following information prints:

UPGRADE started for release xxxx. Release xxxx applied successfully. If any other information prints, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1) immediately.

!

The next time you sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup, messages about the status of the software update display as part of your sign on messages. Please read these messages completely to make sure the software update completed successfully.

11. Sign onto the system console using MSECOFR as your User ID.

4-24


April 2000


12.

At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The following screen displays: SA0711DF QPADEV0092



4590

a.

*ALL

Product Code

DL



2/04/00 15:13:34


Load Date

More: + Description

xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99

1999 BUSINESSLINE YEAR eND

4582

DL

xx/xx/99

xx/xx/99

PARTSLINE ENHANCEMENTS

4580

DL

xx/xx/99

xx/xx/99


4572

DL

XX/XX/99

XX/XX/99

4570

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/99


4565

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/99


SATURN LS MODEL UPDATE

4562

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/98


4560

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/98


4550

DL

xx/xx/98

xx/xx/98


Verify the current Product Release displays under the Product Release column. If any other value displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1).

b.


13. After applying this release, complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before completing a system save. 14. After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally, complete a System Save.

The System Save can be set to process using Delayed Time (see the System Save Instructions). The System Save should be completed within 5 days after loading the release. Make sure the screen print of the Software Version Display screen is stored with the system save tape(s). After a successful system save is completed, the Base Release x.x, Product Release xx tape cartridge can be recycled/reused.

February 2000


4-25

LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES - EXERCISE

LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES EXERCISE 1.

What command is used to load an EOD tape onto the system? ___________________________

2.

4-26

Is a dedicated system required to load an EOD tape?


April 2000


Solutions to Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Updates Exercise

1.

LODRUN TC

2.

No, a dedicated system is not required to load an EOD tape.

February 2000


4-27



4-28


April 2000


.

February 2000


4-29


4-30


April 2000

4

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Updates Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 4-1 ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)........................ 4-2 SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE .................. 4-14 SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD ........................................... 4-26 LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES EXERCISE ............................................................................... 4-39

June 2002


4-i

Table of Contents

4-ii


June 2002

OVERVIEW


OVERVIEW Software updates are enhancements and fixes to the DEALERLINE software. These are sent periodically and should be loaded and applied to your system soon after you receive it. You will receive software updates either electronically [Electronic Object Distribution (EOD)], or on a tape cartridge. With each type of update, Software Update Instructions are sent, along with color-coded packets explaining the enhancement to each applicable DEALERLINE application. The Software Update Instructions in this guide are generic – the set of instructions you receive with each release contain specific instructions, such as checking for a specific operating system and release dependency (dependency will vary with each software update) before loading and applying the software. Any Pre-Update (specific items or conditions to verify before loading the software) and any Post-Update instructions (specific items or conditions to verify after loading the software) are included with the Software Update Instructions. In this guide, replace xxxx with the actual DEALERLINE Base Release and Product Release.

June 2002


4-1


ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) Software releases are automatically sent to your AS/400 system using the Electronic Object Distribution (EOD) process. After the release is sent to your system, RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release) displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen (xxxx=DEALERLINE software release). •


•


The release will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup, after selecting the release on the Work With EOD Objects screen. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections: Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in the Before You Begin section anytime during business hours, one to two days before you plan to apply this release. ⇒ While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen, you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. See step 1, page 4-3. Apply the Release and Set Nightly Backup ⇒ Complete the steps in this section when you are ready to apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup. ⇒ DEALERLINE software releases usually take 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply (not including the nightly backup).

A System Save should be completed within 5 days after a DEALERLINE software update is successfully applied to your system (see the Backups chapter).

4-2


June 2002


Before You Begin Step 1 is optional and may be completed anytime during business hours. 1. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in this release: You may skip this step and continue to step 2. a. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. b. Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). DMM000

DEALERLINE

XL

Main

Menu



23.


90.

Sign Off


6

===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant


c. Type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. The System Administration Main Menu (DMM005) displays. DMM005


Select one of the following: 1. Backups 2. Communications 3. Security 5. Restore 6. Labels 7. Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments 8. Forms Formatting 9. Print Work-Station Printer Assignments 11. Name and Address Menu 13. Reset Remote Dial Connection



1


d. Type 1, Backups, and press Enter.

June 2002


4-3


The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays. SAM100 Backup Menu Select one of the following: 1. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) 2. Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) 3. Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) 4. Power Down System (No Backup) 6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects



e. Type 7, Work With EOD Objects, and press Enter. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092

8/04/97 11:57:35



5

• •

U=Unselect

Name

Description

RELxxxxRGA

Release x.x.xx

F1=Help

F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

+

PgUp

Status

Type *RELEASE

PgDn

If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher, RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0, RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column.

f. Complete one of the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA: •

To display the list, type 5 and press Enter. While the list displays, use Pg Up/Dn keys to display the next/previous screen. Press F3 to return to the Work With EOD Objects screen.

Or

•

To print the list, type 6 and press Enter. The list prints at the system printer.

g. Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays. h. Sign off the system.

4-4


June 2002


Steps 2 through 4 in this section may be completed anytime during business hours, 1 - 2 days before beginning the steps in the Apply the Release and Set Nightly Backup. 2. Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL Base and Product Release levels: a. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup. b. At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The Software Version screen displays: c. Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4.4. If any other value displays, do not load this software; press F3 to return to a command line. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). d. Under the Description column, locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release; see the Software Update Instructions for the specific release). If necessary, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). e. Press F3 to exit. 3. For the EOD application process to work correctly, the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. To verify the user ID has these authorities: a. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your user ID. In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b. At a command line, type WRKUSRPRF xxxxx

June 2002

and press Enter.


4-5






F17=Position to

c. Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (profile). Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner

Opt ---

5





F17=Position to

d. At the Opt field, type 5, Display, and press Enter.

4-6


June 2002


The Display User Profile – Basic screen displays. Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. Display User Profile - Basic 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display User profile........................................................ : SMITH 12=Work with objects by owner User Opt Profile --- -------

5

SMITH

Previous sign-on ............................................... : 11/16/98 08:34:24 Sign-on attempts not valid ................................ : 0 .......................................................................... : *ENABLED Date password last changed ............................. : 08/31/98 Password expiration interval ............................. : 180 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Michelle D. Kalich, CST Date password expires.................................... : 02/27/99 Set password to expired.................................... : *NO User class......................................................... : *USER

Text

Special authority ................. : *ALLOBJ *IOSYSCFG *SECADM Bottom profile..................................................... : QPGMR Parameters for options 1, 2,Group 3, 4 and 5 or command Owner............................................................... : *USRPRF ===> Group authority ................................................. : *NONE F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F17=Position to Group authority type ......................................... : *PRIVATE F21=Select assistance levelSupplemental F24=More groupskeys ........................................ : *NONE Assistance level ................................................ :

*SYSVAL More...

e. Verify the values *ALLOBJ Special Authority field.

*IOSYSCFG and *SECADM are listed in the

•

If the values are listed, press F3 to exit. Skip the rest of this step and continue to step 4.

•

If any of the values are not listed, press F3 to exit and complete the following: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx

f. At a command line, type

CHGUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press F4.

g. Press F10 for additional parameters. h. Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field. i. At the Special Authority field, locate the last line of authority, type + and press the Space Bar once, then press Enter. j. The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays. k. In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field, type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM. l. Press Enter twice. m. One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen, (substitute user ID for xxxxx). User Profile xxxxx Changed.

Or User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values.

These are informational messages. If any other message displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). n. After a user profile is changed, the user must sign off, then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect. o. Continue to step 4. June 2002


4-7


4. Complete the following to initialize tapes for the DEALERLINE nightly backup: a. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup. b. Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup. EDS recommends initializing two tapes as a precaution. If you are prompted for a second tape during this procedure, and one is not available, the backup must be canceled and restarted from the beginning.

c. Sign off the system.

Your system is ready for the release to be applied as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup. 5. Verify any Pre-Update Instructions are complete.

Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run, it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches, only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. Verify any Pre-Update Procedures/Instructions are completed by the appropriate department. If you have questions, please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323, weekdays 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. and Saturday 9 a.m. to 9 p.m. (EST). After listening to the prompts, select the appropriate application.

4-8


June 2002


1. Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE

nightly backup. 2. Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100). To display the Backup Menu: •


Or •


Backup Menu

Select one of the following: 1. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) 2. Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) 3. Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) 4. Power Down System (No Backup) 6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects



1


3. Type 1, Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down), and press Enter.

June 2002


4-9


The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays. SA155201 QPADEV0092

8/04/97 11:57:35


Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print X=Select

+

U=Unselect

Opt

Name

Description

X

RELxxxxRGA

Release x.x.xx

Status

Type *RELEASE

F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn

If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher, RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0 RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. 4. To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup, ensure an X displays under the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA. (If necessary, type X to Select the release.) If you press Enter at this screen with the release Selected (X under the Opt field next to the release), the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup.

If you need to Unselect the release (the release will not apply as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup), type U under the Opt column, next to the release Name and press Enter. The Work With EOD screen and the release will display again when you set up the next DEALERLINE nightly backup; it will continue to display until you Select (X) for the release to apply.

5. Press Enter again to exit this screen. The system performs a series of edits to ensure the release can be applied to your system; this may take a few minutes.

4-10


June 2002



A1505DF SA150501


The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... 2 ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

6. Type 2 and press Enter. It is recommended that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first, especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. The release will be applied before saving the data files. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays. 8/04/97 12:30:40


SA1505DF SA150502

Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE:

The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59).

Enter your selection PLEASE... 00 00 00

ENTER - Continue


CMD-7 - End of Job

7. Type the time you would like the DEALERLINE nightly backup and release to begin. For example 10:00 p.m. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 02 00 00. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. Press Enter to continue.

June 2002


4-11


8. Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a DEALERLINE nightly backup. After completing step 8, the remaining steps can be completed the next morning. 9. After the backup completes, the following information prints: UPGRADE started for release xxxx. Release xxxx applied successfully.

If any other information prints, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1) immediately.

!

The next time you sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup, messages about the status of the software update display as part of the sign on messages. Please read these messages to make sure the software update completed successfully.

10. Sign onto the system console using MSECOFR as your user ID.

4-12


June 2002


11. At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The following screen displays: SA0711DF QPADEV0092



4590 4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 F3=Exit

*ALL

Product Code

DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL



Load Date

XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F4=*Prompt

2/04/00 15:13:34

PTF Information: *NO *YES, *NO More: + Description

1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End

XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98

PARTSLINE Enhancements DEALERLINE 1999 Relase Two Saturn LS Model Update DEALERLINE 1999 Release One Common Delivery Reporting GM Stocking Guide Update 1998 BUSINESSLINE Year End DEALERLINE 1998 Release Two Required VIN Changes

F17=Top

F18=Bottom

PgUp

PgDn

a. On the first detail line, under the Description column locate the Description of the new software; ensure the new Product Release code displays under the Product Release column. In this example, 4590 is the new Product Release, and the Description of the new software is 1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End. If any other value displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center. b. Press F3 to return to a command line. 12. After applying this release, complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before completing a system save. 13. After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally, complete a System Save.

You can set up the System Save for Delayed-Time processing (see the System Save Instructions). The System Save should be completed within 5 days after loading the release. Make sure the screen print of the Software Version Display screen is stored with the system save tape(s). 14. Ensure any Post-Update Procedures/Instructions are completed by the appropriate department.

June 2002


4-13


SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The following instructions are to load and apply the software update from a tape cartridge. These instructions are generic. Each software update is identified by a Base Release and a Product Release number. In these instructions, xxxx represents the DEALERLINE Product Release number, for example, 4590. Each software release will first require your operating system version and DEALERLINE software Product Release to be at a specific version or release. (See the following section, Before You Begin, step 2.) Additionally, some releases require Pre-Update and/or Post-Update Instructions be completed before or after loading the software update. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections:

• Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in this section, anytime during business hours, 1 to 2 days before you plan to apply this release. ⇒ Step 4, page 4-18, contains the instructions to restore the release from the tape cartridge to your system. If this step is not completed, the release will not load. After this step is complete, RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release) displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen when you set up your DEALERLINE nightly backup. •


•


⇒ The release is restored in a Selected status and will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup unless you Unselect it (see step 4, page 22, in the Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup section). While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen, you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. See step 7, page 4-19, in this section for instructions.


4-14


June 2002


Before You Begin Steps 1 through 7 may be completed anytime during business hours, 1 - 2 days before beginning the steps in Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup. 1. Clean the tape drive to prevent tape drive errors from occurring during this procedure. 2. Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL Base and Product Release levels: a. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your User ID. b. At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The Software Version screen displays. SA0711DF QPADEV0092


DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4.44.4 Creation Date . . . . . : 10/26/94 Load Date . . . . . . . : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release

4590 4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550

F3=Exit

*ALL

Product Code

DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL

Operating System Release : VxRxM0 V3R2M0


Load Date

XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98

F4=*Prompt

2/04/00 15:13:34



XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98

PARTSLINE Enhancements DEALERLINE 1999 Relase Two Saturn LS Model Update DEALERLINE 1999 Release One Common Delivery Reporting GM Stocking Guide Update 1998 BUSINESSLINE Year End DEALERLINE 1998 Release Two

F17=Top

F18=Bottom

PgUp

PgDn

c. Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4.4. If any other value displays, do not load this software; press F3 to return to a command line. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). d. Under the Description column, locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release; see the Software Update Instructions for the specific release). If necessary, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). e. Press F3 to exit.

June 2002


4-15


3. For the EOD application process to work correctly, the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. To verify the backup user ID has these authorities: a. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR

as your user ID.

In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b. At a command line, type

WRKUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press Enter.





F17=Position to

c. Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (user profile). Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner

Opt ---

5





F17=Position to


4-16


June 2002



11/16/98 0 *ENABLED 08/31/98 180 02/27/99 *NO *USER

08:34:24







continue to step 4. • If any of the values are not listed, press F3 to exit and continue to step f: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup in place of xxxxx f. At a command line, type

CHGUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press F4.

g. Press F10 for additional parameters. h. Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field. i. At the Special Authority field, locate the last line of authority, type + and press the Space Bar once, then press Enter. j. The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays. k. In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field, type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM. l. Press Enter twice. m. One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen, (substitute user ID for xxxxx). User Profile xxxxx Changed. Or

User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values.

These are informational messages. If any other message displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). n. After a user profile is changed, the user must sign off, then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect. o. Continue to step 4.

June 2002


4-17


4. This step copies the release onto your system from the tape cartridge. This step should take 30 minutes or less to complete and does not require a dedicated system. a. Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. (This user ID has authority to DEALERLINE libraries.) b. Insert the Base Release x.x, Product Release xx tape cartridge into the tape drive. c. At a command line type

LODRUN TC

and press Enter.

Informational messages display. When the following message displays: 1 Release Restored and 1 Release Scheduled to be applied during your Nightly Backup

The release is successfully restored to your system and will now display as either RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release – Non-RISC or RISC) on the Work With EOD Objects screen. d. Remove the tape from the tape drive. e. Continue to step 5.

5. Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup.

!




4-18


June 2002


Step 7 may be completed anytime, as long as the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. 7. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in this release:

! This step is optional. a. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. b. Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000); continue to step c. Or

Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100); at a command line, type GO and press Enter, then continue to step e. DMM000

DEALERLINE

XL

Main

SAM100

Menu



23.


90.

Sign Off

Selection or command ===> 6 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant









d. Type 1, Backups, and press Enter

June 2002


4-19



Backup Menu




e. Type 7, Work With EOD Objects, and press Enter. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092 More: + Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt

5

Name

F3=Exit

X=Select

U=Unselect

Description

RELxxxxRGA

F1=Help

8/04/97 11:57:35


Status

Release x.x.xx

F12=Cancel

PgUp

Type *RELEASE

PgDn

•


•


f. Complete one of the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA: •


•



4-20


June 2002


Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run, it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches, only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. If you have questions, please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323, weekdays 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. and Saturday 9 a.m. to 9 p.m. (EST). After listening to the prompts, select the appropriate application.

1. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEAQLERLINE nightly backup. 2. Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100): • From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000), type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. From the System Administration Main Menu (DMM005), type 1, Backups, and press Enter. Or

•


Backup Menu





June 2002


4-21



8/04/97 11:57:35



Name RELxxxxRGA

F1=Help

F3=Exit

X=Select

U=Unselect

Description

Status

Type

RELEASE

*SELECTED

*RELEASE

x.x.xx

F12=Cancel

PgUp

+

PgDn

•


•


4. To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup: (If *SELECTED DOES NOT display as the Status, type X at the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA.) Press Enter (with an X at the Opt field) - the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup.

!


5. Press Enter again to exit this screen.

!

4-22



June 2002



A1505DF SA150501




EDS recommends that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first, especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. The release will be applied before saving the data files. 6. Type 2 and press Enter. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays. 8/04/97 12:30:40


SA1505DF SA150502


ENTER - Continue

00 00 00


CMD-7 - End of Job

7. Type the time you would like the nightly backup and release to begin. For example, 10:00 p.m. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 02 00 00. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 2 to 4 hours to apply. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. Press Enter to continue.

June 2002


4-23


8. Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a backup. After completing step 8, the remaining steps can be completed the next morning. 9. After the backup completes, the following information prints: UPGRADE started for release xxxx. Release xxxx applied successfully.


!



4-24


June 2002





4590 4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 F3=Exit

*ALL

Product Code




Load Date


2/04/00 15:13:34





F17=Top

F18=Bottom

PgUp

PgDn

a. Verify the current Product Release displays under the Product Release column. If any other value displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). b. Press F3 to return to a command line. 13. After applying this release, complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before

completing a system save. 14. After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally, complete a System Save.


June 2002


4-25

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD The following instructions are to load and apply the software update from a CD (RISC V3R7M0 and Higher and CISC – V3R2M0). These instructions are generic. Each software update is identified by a Base Release and a Product Release number. In these instructions, xxxx represents the DEALERLINE Product Release number, for example, 4590. Each software release will first require your operating system version and DEALERLINE software Product Release to be at a specific version or release. (See the following section, Before You Begin, step 2.) Additionally, some releases require Pre-Update and/or Post-Update Instructions be completed before or after loading the software update. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections:

• Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in this section, anytime during business hours, 1 to 2 days before you plan to apply this release. ⇒ Step 4 (in the Before You Begin section) contains the instructions to restore the release from the CD to your system. If this step is not completed, the release will not load. After this step is complete, RELxxxxRGA displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen when you set up your DEALERLINE nightly backup. ⇒ The release is restored in a Selected status and will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup unless you Unselect it (see step 4 in the Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup section). While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen, you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. See step 7 (in the Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup section).


4-26


June 2002


Before You Begin 1. Complete steps 1 through 7 anytime during business hours 1 to 2 days before beginning the steps in the next section Apply and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup. 2. Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL Base and Product Release levels: a. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your User ID. b. At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The Software Version screen displays. c. Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4.4. If any other value displays, do not load this software; press F3 to return to a command line. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). d. Under the Description column, locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release; see the Software Update Instruction, sent with the CD, for the specific release). If necessary, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). e. Press F3 to exit.

June 2002


4-27


3. For the EOD application process to work correctly, the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. To verify the backup user ID has these authorities: a. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR

as your user ID.

In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b. At a command line, type

WRKUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press Enter.





F17=Position to

c. Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (user profile). Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner

Opt ---

5





F17=Position to


4-28


June 2002



11/16/98 0 *ENABLED 08/31/98 180 02/27/99 *NO *USER

08:34:24







continue to step 4. • If any of the values are not listed, press F3 to exit and continue to step f: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup in place of xxxxx f. At a command line, type

CHGUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press F4.

g. Press F10 for additional parameters. h. Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field. i. At the Special Authority field, locate the last line of authority, type + and press the Space Bar once, then press Enter. j. The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays. k. In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field, type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM. l. Press Enter twice. m. One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen, (substitute user ID for xxxxx). User Profile xxxxx Changed. Or

User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values.

These are informational messages. If any other message displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). n. After a user profile is changed, the user must sign off, then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect. o. Continue to step 4.

June 2002


4-29


4. This step copies the release onto your system from the tape cartridge. This step should take 5 minutes or less to complete and does not require a dedicated system. a. Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. (This user ID has authority to DEALERLINE libraries.) b. Insert the Base Release x.x, Product Release xx CD into the CD-ROM drive. c. At a command line type

LODRUN OPT01

and press Enter.

Informational messages display. When the following message displays: 1 Release Restored and 1 Release Scheduled to be applied during your Nightly Backup

The release is successfully restored to your system and will now display as RELxxxxRGA on the Work With EOD Objects screen. d. Remove the CD from the drive. e. Continue to step 5.

5. Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup.

!




4-30


June 2002


Step 7 may be completed anytime, as long as the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. 7. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in this release:

! This step is optional. a. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. b. Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000); continue to step c. Or

Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100); at a command line, type GO and press Enter, then continue to step e. DMM000

DEALERLINE

XL

Main

SAM100

Menu



23.


90.

Sign Off

Selection or command ===> 6 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant









d. Type 1, Backups, and press Enter

June 2002


4-31



Backup Menu




e. Type 7, Work With EOD Objects, and press Enter. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092 More: + Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt

5

Name

F3=Exit

X=Select

U=Unselect

Description

RELxxxxRGA

F1=Help

8/04/97 11:57:35


Status

Release x.x.xx

F12=Cancel

PgUp

Type *RELEASE

PgDn

f. Complete the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA: •


•



4-32


June 2002


Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run, it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches, only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. If you have questions, please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323, weekdays 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. and Saturday 9 a.m. to 9 p.m. (EST). After listening to the prompts, select the appropriate application.

1. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEAQLERLINE nightly backup. 2. Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100): • From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000), type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. From the System Administration Main Menu (DMM005), type 1, Backups, and press Enter. Or

•


Backup Menu





June 2002


4-33



8/04/97 11:57:35



Name RELxxxxRGA

F1=Help

F3=Exit

X=Select

U=Unselect

Description

Status

Type

RELEASE

*SELECTED

*RELEASE

x.x.xx

F12=Cancel

PgUp

+

PgDn

4. To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup, press Enter (with an X at the Opt field) - the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup. Note: If *SELECTED DOES NOT display as the Status, type X at the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA, then press Enter.

!


5. Press Enter again to exit this screen.

!

4-34



June 2002



A1505DF SA150501




EDS recommends that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first, especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. The release will be applied before saving the data files. 6. Type 2 and press Enter. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays. 8/04/97 12:30:40


SA1505DF SA150502


ENTER - Continue

00 00 00


CMD-7 - End of Job

7. Type the time you would like the nightly backup and release to begin. For example, 10:00 p.m. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 02 00 00. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 2 to 4 hours to apply. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. Press Enter to continue.

June 2002


4-35


8. Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a backup. After completing step 8, the remaining steps can be completed the next morning. 9. After the backup completes, the following information prints: UPGRADE started for release xxxx. Release xxxx applied successfully.


!



4-36


June 2002





4590 4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 F3=Exit

*ALL

Product Code




Load Date


2/04/00 15:13:34





F17=Top

F18=Bottom

PgUp

PgDn

a. Verify the current Product Release displays under the Product Release column. If any other value displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). b. Press F3 to return to a command line. 13. After applying this release, complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before

completing a system save. 14. After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally, complete a System Save.


June 2002


4-37


4-38


June 2002


LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES EXERCISE 1.

What command is used to load an EOD tape onto the system? ___________________________

2.

Is a dedicated system required to load an EOD tape?

June 2002


4-39


Solutions to Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Updates - Exercise

1.

LODRUN TC

2.

No, a dedicated system is not required to load an EOD tape.

4-40


June 2002

5

Miscellaneous System Functions Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 1 DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE 2 PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 .......... 3 VARY DEVICE ON/OFF................................................................ 6 Workstation or Printer .............................................................. 6 Tape Drive ............................................................................... 7 WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF).................................... 8 Change Printer......................................................................... 9 Hold a Spool File (Report)...................................................... 10 Delete a Spool File (Report)................................................... 11 Display a Spool File (Report) ................................................. 12 Release (Print) a Spool File (Report) ..................................... 14 DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES ...................................................... 15 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE ........ 16

April 2000

Miscellaneous System Functions

5-i

Table of Contents


5-ii

System Administration

April 2000

OVERVIEW

Miscellaneous System Functions OVERVIEW This chapter provides common miscellaneous system functions and procedures: •

Display DEALERLINE software release

•

Display the Operating System release

•

Print a device listing

•

Vary a device on or off

•

Work with spool files

•

Display system values

April 2000


5-1

DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE

DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE To display the current DEALERLINE Base Release/Product Release, and the current Operating System Release: 1.

Complete one of the following from a command line: Type VER and press Enter. Or At a command line, type GO DMM000 and press Enter to display the DEALERINE XL Main Menu. Type 23, DEALERLINE Version, and press Enter. The version screen displays:

DEALERLINE Base Release

SA0711DF QPADEV0092

DEALERLINE Product Release



xxxx

*ALL

Product Code

DL



8/04/97 15:13:34

Operating System Release


Load Date

More: + Description

xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

4580

DL

xx/xx/99

4575

DL

XX/XX/99

xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99

DEALERLINE PARTS REWRITE

4570

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/99


4565

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/99


4562

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/98


4560

DL

XX/XX/98

XX/XX/98


4550

DL

xx/xx/98

4545

DL

XX/XX/98

xx/xx/98 XX/XX/98


DEALERLINE 1998 RELEASE TWO Required VIN Changes

If More..+ displays in the lower right of the screen, press the Shift + Arrow Up keys at the same time, to display additional information. 2.


When contacting the Customer Support Center, it is important you know the DEALERLINE software and Operating System Release; by relaying this information, a Customer Support Representative may be able to more quickly answer a question or diagnose a problem.

5-2


April 2000

PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400

PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 To create a report of all devices (with ports, addresses and types) attached to a workstation controller on the AS/400: 1.


PRTDEVADR

and press F4.

The Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) screen displays. Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) Type choices, press Enter. Controller description . . . . .


2.

F5=Refresh

CTL01

F12=Cancel

Name


Type the controller description (ID) and press Enter. (You could also type the following at a command line: PRTDEVADR CTL01 and press Enter. If needed, to print information for a second controller, change CTL01 to CTL02.)

3.

The matrix prints at the system printer.

!

April 2000

A device address listing for a remote controller must be manually created.


5-3


Following is an example of a device address listing: 5769SS1 V4R2M0

:

: :

:

5-4

940909

Device Addresses for S1020334 4/04/00 13:48:52 Page Local Work Station Controller CTL01 Type 915A Switch Setting --> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ : : : : : : : : : W1 : #GUIDE7 : W3 : : : : : Port 0 : *DSP : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : 3180 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Port 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : : PL : : Q0 : NX : Port 2 : : : : *DSP : : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : 5150 1 : : 5150 1 : 3477 FA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : W5 : : PA4 : SDSPC : : : PT : Port 3 : *DSP : : *PRT : *DSP : : : *PRT : : 5150 1 : : 4214 2 : 5150 1 : : : 4214 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : R3 : PCK : : : II3 : PCY : : Port 4 : *DSP : *DSP : : : *DSP : *DSP : : : 5150 1 : 5150 1 : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : PL : : Q0 : NX : Port 5 : : : : *DSP : : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : 5150 1 : : 5150 1 : 3477 FA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : W6 : : PA4 : SDSPC : : : PT : Port 6 : *DSP : : *PRT : *DSP : : : *PRT : : 5150 1 : : 4214 2 : 5150 1 : : : 4214 6 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : R8 : PCK : : : II3 : PCY : : Port 7 : *DSP : *DSP : : : *DSP : *DSP : : : 5150 1 : 5150 1 : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:


April 2000

1


To create a report for all devices (with ports, addresses, and types) for all workstation controllers on the AS/400: 1.


GO DEVICESTS and press Enter.

The Device Status Tasks screen displays: DEVICESTS

Device Status Tasks System: To select one of the following, type its number below and press Enter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 10.

Work Work Work Work

with with with with

S123635

display devices printer devices tape devices diskette devices

Work with local device addresses

Type a menu option below F1=Help

2.

F3=Exit

F9=Command line

F12=Cancel

Type 10, Work with local device address, and press Enter.

!

Depending on the type of twinaxial IOA [workstation controller], it will either have ports.

8

or

4

A maximum of 7 devices can be on each port.

4

A port workstation controller can have a maximum of 28 device sessions; however, an 8 port workstation controller can only have a maximum of 40 devices. If PCs are connected to a workstation controller, the number of devices allowed is reduced. A PC can equal 1.5 to 4 terminals, depending on the bandwidth created by the PC. 3.

The matrix prints at the system printer.

April 2000


5-5

VARY DEVICE ON/OFF

VARY DEVICE ON/OFF A workstation will automatically vary off is a user attempts to sign on with an invalid user ID or password 3 times. In order to make the device useable again, it must be varied on from another workstation. The tape device (TC), may become varied off causing the nightly backup to not start.

!

A workstation is varied off when the cursor is in the upper left-corner of the screen.

Workstation or Printer Complete the following to vary on a workstation or printer: •

If you know the device ID: ◊

A command line, type press Enter.

WRKCFGSTS

*DEV

xx

(xx=device ID) and

Or ◊

If you know the device begins with W, type WRKCFGSTS *DEV W* and press Enter. All devices beginning with the letter W displays. [Command WRKDEVD W* can also be used.]

•

If you do not know the device ID: 1.


WRKCFGSTS

*DEV

and press Enter.

2.

The Work with Configuration Status screen displays all devices on the AS/400. Work with Configuration Status 09/15/99 Position to

. . . . .

Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 9=Display mode status ... Opt __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

Description WA WB WC W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6

S1020334 13:57:47

Starting characters

Status SIGN ON DISPLAY VARY ON PENDING ACTIVE VARY ON PENDING SIGN ON DISPLAY VARY ON PENDING VARY ON PENDING VARY ON PENDING VARIED OFF

8=Work with description -------------Job-------------WC

STUDENT

026074

More... Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel

3.

F23=More options

F24=More keys

At the Opt field next to the device ID (Description), type 1 to vary on the device, if the Status is VARIED OFF. If the Status of a device is FAILED or RCYPND, vary the device off (type 2 to vary off the device), then vary on the device (type 1 to vary on the device). Another command that can be used to locate or display devices is WRKDEVD

5-6


April 2000

VARY DEVICE ON/OFF

Tape Drive Complete the following to vary on a tape drive: A command line, type • •

WRKCFGSTS

*DEV

TC

and press Enter.

If the Status is Failed, vary off the tape drive, then vary on the tape drive. If the Status is Varied off, vary on the tape drive.

The correct Status of the tape drive should be Varied on.

April 2000


5-7

WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF)

WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) When a report is submitted for processing, it is either held in the spool file or it is directed to a printer for immediate printing. When a report is help in the spool file, you can use the WRKSPLF command to display the report at your terminal, print, delete, or redirect the report to print at a different printer.

!

Type WRKSPLF to display all spool files created by the user who is signed onto the terminal (from where the command is typed).

While submitting a report, some screens have a Hold Print field – type Y to hold the report in the spool file. To access a report held in the spool file: 1.

At any command line, type WRKSPLF and press Enter. The Work with All Spooled Files screen displays. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 5

File PI4655RP

User DOCMDK

Device or Queue DUMP

User Data PI4655RG

6=Release

Sts OPN

Total Pages 10

7=Messages Cur Page

Copy 1

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel

F22=Printers

F24=More keys

It is recommended to delete spool files not needed on a regular basis. Some files could contain hundreds of pages and require system space to retain them. 2.

Locate the spool file (report) to display or print. The most recent reports processed display at the bottom of the spool file list. The File name listed on this screen, is the name of the program that processes; it is not the name/number of the screen where you submitted the report from. To ensure you are working with the correct report, it may be necessary to view (5, Display) several Files until the correct report displays. See the following sections to Change printers, Hold, Delete, Display, or Release (print) a spool file (report).

5-8


April 2000


Change Printer To direct a report to print at a different printer: 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to change the printer for. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. 2.

From the Work with All Spooled Files screen, type 2, Change, at the Opt field next to the File name and press Enter. The Change Spooled File Attributes screen displays: Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) Type choices, press Enter. Spooled file . . . . Job name . . . . . . User . . . . . . . Number . . . . . . Spooled file number Printer . . . . . . Print sequence . . . Form type . . . . . Copies . . . . . . . Restart printing . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

> QSYSPRT > PI1560CL > DOCMDK > 534991 > 1 *OUTQ___ *SAME *STD 1___ *STRPAGE

Name, *SELECT Name, * Name 000000-999999 1-9999, *ONLY, *LAST Name, *SAME, *OUTQ *SAME, *NEXT Form type, *SAME, *STD 1-255, *SAME Number, *SAME, *STRPAGE...

Additional Parameters

3.

Output queue . . . . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . .

DUMP QGPL

Name, *SAME, *DEV Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display

F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys

Bottom F12=Cancel

At the Printer field, type the Printer ID of the printer to print the report and press Field Exit, then Enter. The report is directed to the printer you specified.

April 2000


5-9


Hold a Spool File (Report) To hold the spool file (report) in the spool file: 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to place on hold. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 3

File PI4655RP QSYSPRT

User DOCMDK DOCMDK

Device or Queue P1 DUMP

User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG

6=Release

Sts RDY *HLD

Total Pages 10 93

7=Messages Cur Page

Copy 1 1


F22=Printers

F24=More keys

2. At the Opt field, next to the File name, type 3, Hold and press Enter. The file Sts (status) changes to *HLD. The report will remain on hold in the spool file until you type 6, Release to release the report or 4, Delete.

5-10


April 2000


Delete a Spool File (Report) To delete the spool file (report):

1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to delete. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 4


User DOCMDK DOCMDK


6=Release


Sts RDY RDY

7=Messages

Total Pages 10 93

Cur Page

Copy 1 1


2.

F22=Printers

F24=More keys

At the Opt field, next to the File name, type 4, Delete, and press Enter.

More than one file can be deleted at the same time – if you have more than one file to delete, type 4 next to each file. The Confirm Delete of Spool File(s) screen displays. Confirm Delete of Spooled Files Press Enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices. Opt 4

File QSYSPRT

User DOCMDK


User Data PI1564RG

Sts RDY

Total Pages 93

Cur Page

Copy 1

Bottom F10=View 3

3.

F11=View 2

F12=Cancel

Press Enter. The spool file(s) is deleted and the Work with All Spooled Files screen displays.

April 2000


5-11


Display a Spool File (Report) To view the spool file (report):

1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to display. It may be necessary to first display several files - the most recent files/reports display at the bottom of the screen. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 5 _


User DOCMDK DOCMDK



6=Release

Sts RDY RDY

7=Messages

Total Pages 10 93

Cur Page

Copy 1 1


2.

F22=Printers

F24=More keys

At the Opt field, next to the File name, type 5, Display, and press Enter.

5-12


April 2000


The Display Spool File screen displays: Display Spooled File File . . . . . : PI4655RP Page/Line 1/3 Control . . . . . ________ Columns 1 - 130 Find . . . . . . _______________ *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8....+....9....+....0....+....1....+....2....+....3 PRINT DATE: 4/04/00 14:18:04 TEST MOTORS #3 PROGRAM: PI4655RG PAGE: 1 COMPANY NUMBER: 03 GUIDE FILE REPORT WRKSTN: QPADEV0056 USER: DOCMDK REQUIRED PARTS NOT AVAILABLE GROUP OTHER HI LO ON ON LAST SALE MONTHLY SALES HISTORY PART NO NO. DESCRIPTION COST CARLINE G YR YR PKG STK AVAIL ORD BKO DATE BIN MAR FEB JAN DEC NOV 274288 05875 STEM 1.13 GBPKOC 2000 1957 5 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 334671 07242 CLAMP 1.83 G P C 2000 1976 1 SP 11 0 03/16/1999 1 0 0 0 0 341953 16261 ROLLER 5.82 G OC 2000 1974 1 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 345215 04338 FITTING 6.61 GBPKOC 1995 1964 1 SP 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 356668 02335 CLAMP 3.42 GBPKOC 2000 1976 1 SP 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 363455 03616 HANGER 1.57 BPKOC 2000 1976 1 SP 11 0 03/16/1999 1 0 0 0 0 459021 00027 MOUNT MT 24.45 GBPKOC 1999 1974 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 465840 02251 SHI 1.32 G C 1993 1973 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 476574 00649 BEARING3.27 G P C 2000 1980 2 SP 0 0 0 08/22/1997 0 0 0 0 0 601261 10553 RETAINE 2.93 GBPKOC 2000 1953 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1136519 09170 COMPRESS 257.81 G OC Y 2000 1996 1 SP 0 1 0 06/16/1997 0 0 0 0 0 1252240 13095 BREAKER3.75 GBPKOC 1999 1977 1 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1381487 01745 GROMMET 3.30 GBPKOC 1993 1974 1 SP 0 1 0 32 0 0 0 0 0 1394293 04037 KIT .87 GBPKOC 1994 1974 1 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 More... F3=Exit F12=Cancel F19=Left F20=Right F24=More keys

3.

Complete any of the following:

• • •

To advance the screen forward or back, press PgUp/DgDn keys [Roll Up ↑or Roll Down keys ↓]. To advance the screen a specific number of detail lines, type a value at the Control field (at the top of the screen). For example, type +10 and press Enter to advance the screen 10 detail lines (type –10 to go back 10 detail lines). To locate a specific word or group of words, type the word(s) at the find field and press F16. The screen advances to the word or group of word(s) you typed.

•

To shift the screen right (to view any additional information), press F20, Right.

•

To shift the screen left (to view any additional information), press F19, Left.

•

To return to the Work with All Spooled Files screen, press F12, Cancel.

April 2000


5-13


Release (Print) a Spool File (Report) To release a held spool file (report): 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to release. Files/reports that are held display HLD in the Sts (status) column. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 6 _


User DOCMDK DOCMDK



6=Release

Sts HLD RDY

Total Pages 10 93

7=Messages Cur Page

Copy 1 1


F22=Printers

F24=More keys

2. At the Opt field, next to the File name of the held report, type 6, Release, and press Enter. The Sts display *RLS, then changes to RDY (ready) The report is ready to be printed at the printer specified for this job (or the default printer).

5-14


April 2000

DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES

DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES A system value is information that defines data and/or functions. To view any system value: 1.

At a command line, type DSPSYSVAL and press F4. The Display System Value (DSPSYSVAL) screen displays: Display System Value

(DSPSYSVAL)

Type choices, press Enter. System value ................

QTIME

Output

*

QABNORMSW, QACGLVL,...(press F4 to get a list of all *, *PRINT system values

Bottom

F3=Exit

2.

F4=Prompt

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


At the System value field, type the system value to view (in this example, QTIME is typed to display the system time. At the Output field, type *PRINT to print the information, or leave * to view the information.

3.

Press Enter. The following information displays: Display System Value

(DSPSYSVAL)

Type choices, press Enter. System value ................ Description

Time .......................

QTIME Time of day

13:20:00

Press Enter to continue. Bottom F3=Exit

4.

F12=Cancel

After reviewing the information, press F3 to exit.

!

April 2000

WRKSYSVAL

command can also be used to display system value(s).


5-15

MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE

MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE 1.

What steps did you use to determine the DEALERLINE release on your AS/400? _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________

2.

What steps do you use to determine the system date? _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________

3.

If a device is varied off, the cursor will be in the upper: _____ A. _____ B.

4.

The command used to list devices attached to the AS/400 is: _____ _____ _____ _____

5.

A. B. C. D.

LSTDEVATCH PRTDEVADR WRKHDWPRD CRTDEVATCLST

The easiest command to use to vary on a device is: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

5-16

Left hand corner Right hand corner

A. B. C. D. E.

VARYON PRTDEVADR WRKHDWPRD WRKDEVD WRKCFGSTS


April 2000


Solutions to Miscellaneous System Functions - Exercise 1.

From any command line, type VER and press Enter, or from the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000), type 23 DEALERLINE Version, and press Enter.

2.

From any command line, type DSPSYSVAL and press F4, define the system value as QDATE and press Enter.

3.

A.

4.

B.

5.

E.

April 2000


5-17



5-18


April 2000

5

Miscellaneous System Functions Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 5-1 DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE................................................................................... 5-2 PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 ....... 5-3 VARY DEVICE ON/OFF............................................................. 5-6 Workstation or Printer ........................................................... 5-6 Tape Drive ............................................................................ 5-7 WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF)................................. 5-8 Change Printer...................................................................... 5-9 Hold a Spool File (Report)................................................... 5-10 Delete a Spool File (Report)................................................ 5-11 Display a Spool File (Report) .............................................. 5-12 Release (Print) a Spool File (Report) .................................. 5-14 DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES ................................................... 5-15 SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD ....................... 5-16 Create the Report Storage File on the AS/400.................... 5-17 Place Your Reports on Hold and Retrieve Spool File Information .......................................................................... 5-19 Copy the Held reports (spool files) into the MEREPORTS storage file .......................................................................... 5-21 Copy the MEREPORTS file to an Initialized Tape Cartridge ............................................................................. 5-26 View MEREPORTS File ...................................................... 5-28 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE ..... 5-29

June 2002


5-i

Table of Contents


5-ii


June 2002

OVERVIEW


OVERVIEW This chapter provides common miscellaneous system functions and procedures: •

Display DEALERLINE software release

•

Display the Operating System release

•

Print a device listing

•

Vary a device on or off

•

Work with spool files

•

Display system values

•

Save (archive) reports to a tape cartridge / CD

June 2002


5-1

DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE

DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE To display the current DEALERLINE Base Release/Product Release, and the current Operating System Release: 1. Complete one of the following from a command line: Type VER and press Enter. Or At a command line, type GO DMM000 and press Enter to display the DEALERINE XL Main Menu. Type 23, DEALERLINE Version, and press Enter. The version screen displays:

DEALERLINE Base Release

SA0711DF QPADEV0092

DEALERLINE Product Release



XXXX 4580 4575 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 4540

*ALL

Product Code


Load Date

8/04/97 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0


Operating System Release


XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98


DEALERLINE 1999 Relase Two DEALERLINE Parts Rewrite DEALERLINE 1999 Release One Common Delivery Reporting GM Stocking Guide Update 1998 BUSINESSLINE Year End DEALERLINE 1998 Release Two Required VIN Changes DEALERLINE 1998 Release One

F17=Top

F18=Bottom

More... F3=Exit

F4=*Prompt

PgUp

PgDn

If More..+ displays in the lower right of the screen, press the Shift + Arrow Up keys at the same time, to display additional information.

2. Press F3 to return to a command line. When contacting the Customer Support Center, it is important you know the DEALERLINE software and Operating System Release; by relaying this information, a Customer Support Representative may be able to more quickly answer a question or diagnose a problem.

5-2


June 2002


PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 To create a report of all devices (with ports, addresses and types) attached to a workstation controller on the AS/400: 1. At a command line, type PRTDEVADR and press F4. The Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) screen displays. Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) Type choices, press Enter. Controller description . . . . .


F5=Refresh

CTL01

F12=Cancel

Name


2. Type the controller description (ID) and press Enter. (You could also type the following at a command line: PRTDEVADR CTL01 and press Enter. If needed, to print information for a second controller, change CTL01 to CTL02.) 3. The matrix prints at the system printer.

!

June 2002

A device address listing for a remote controller must be manually created.


5-3


Following is an example of a device address listing: 5769SS1 V4R2M0

:

: :

:

5-4

940909

Device Addresses for S1020334 4/04/00 13:48:52 Page Local Work Station Controller CTL01 Type 915A Switch Setting --> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ : : : : : : : : : W1 : #GUIDE7 : W3 : : : : : Port 0 : *DSP : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : 3180 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Port 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : : PL : : Q0 : NX : Port 2 : : : : *DSP : : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : 5150 1 : : 5150 1 : 3477 FA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : W5 : : PA4 : SDSPC : : : PT : Port 3 : *DSP : : *PRT : *DSP : : : *PRT : : 5150 1 : : 4214 2 : 5150 1 : : : 4214 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : R3 : PCK : : : II3 : PCY : : Port 4 : *DSP : *DSP : : : *DSP : *DSP : : : 5150 1 : 5150 1 : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : PL : : Q0 : NX : Port 5 : : : : *DSP : : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : 5150 1 : : 5150 1 : 3477 FA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : W6 : : PA4 : SDSPC : : : PT : Port 6 : *DSP : : *PRT : *DSP : : : *PRT : : 5150 1 : : 4214 2 : 5150 1 : : : 4214 6 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : R8 : PCK : : : II3 : PCY : : Port 7 : *DSP : *DSP : : : *DSP : *DSP : : : 5150 1 : 5150 1 : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:


June 2002

1


To create a report for all devices (with ports, addresses, and types) for all workstation controllers on the AS/400: 1. At a command line, type GO DEVICESTS and press Enter. The Device Status Tasks screen displays: DEVICESTS

Device Status Tasks System: To select one of the following, type its number below and press Enter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 10.

Work Work Work Work

with with with with

S123635

display devices printer devices tape devices diskette devices

Work with local device addresses

Type a menu option below F1=Help

F3=Exit

F9=Command line

F12=Cancel

2. Type 10, Work with local device address, and press Enter.

!

Depending on the type of twinaxial IOA [workstation controller], it will either have

8

or

4

ports.

A maximum of 7 devices can be on each port. A 4 port workstation controller can have a maximum of 28 device sessions; however, an 8 port workstation controller can only have a maximum of 40 devices. If PCs are connected to a workstation controller, the number of devices allowed is reduced. A PC can equal 1.5 to 4 terminals, depending on the bandwidth created by the PC. 3. The matrix prints at the system printer.

June 2002


5-5

VARY DEVICE ON/OFF

VARY DEVICE ON/OFF A workstation will automatically vary off is a user attempts to sign on with an invalid user ID or password 3 times. In order to make the device useable again, it must be varied on from another workstation. The tape device (TC), may become varied off causing the nightly backup to not start.

!

A workstation is varied off when the cursor is in the upper left-corner of the screen.

Workstation or Printer Complete the following to vary on a workstation or printer: •

If you know the device ID: ◊

A command line, type WRKCFGSTS press Enter.

*DEV

xx

(xx=device ID) and

Or ◊

If you know the device begins with W, type WRKCFGSTS *DEV W* and press Enter. All devices beginning with the letter W displays. [Command WRKDEVD W* can also be used.]

•

If you do not know the device ID: 1. At a command line, type WRKCFGSTS

*DEV

and press Enter.

2. The Work with Configuration Status screen displays all devices on the AS/400. Work with Configuration Status 09/15/99 Position to

. . . . .

Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 9=Display mode status ... Opt __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

Description WA WB WC W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6

S1020334 13:57:47

Starting characters

Status SIGN ON DISPLAY VARY ON PENDING ACTIVE VARY ON PENDING SIGN ON DISPLAY VARY ON PENDING VARY ON PENDING VARY ON PENDING VARIED OFF

8=Work with description -------------Job-------------WC

STUDENT

026074

More... Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel

F23=More options

F24=More keys

3. At the Opt field next to the device ID (Description), type 1 to vary on the device, if the Status is VARIED OFF.

5-6


June 2002

VARY DEVICE ON/OFF

If the Status of a device is FAILED or RCYPND, vary the device off (type 2 to vary off the device), then vary on the device (type 1 to vary on the device). Another command that can be used to locate or display devices is WRKDEVD

Tape Drive Complete the following to vary on a tape drive: A command line, type WRKCFGSTS • •

*DEV

TC and press Enter.

If the Status is Failed, vary off the tape drive, then vary on the tape drive. If the Status is Varied off, vary on the tape drive.

The correct Status of the tape drive should be Varied on.

June 2002


5-7


WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) When a report is submitted for processing, it is either held in the spool file or it is directed to a printer for immediate printing. When a report is help in the spool file, you can use the WRKSPLF command to display the report at your terminal, print, delete, or redirect the report to print at a different printer.

!

Type WRKSPLF to display all spool files created by the user who is signed onto the terminal (from where the command is typed).

While submitting a report, some screens have a Hold Print field – type Y to hold the report in the spool file. To access a report held in the spool file: 1. At any command line, type WRKSPLF and press Enter. The Work with All Spooled Files screen displays. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 5

File PI4655RP

User DOCMDK


User Data PI4655RG

6=Release

Sts OPN

Total Pages 10

7=Messages Cur Page

Copy 1


F22=Printers

F24=More keys

It is recommended to delete spool files not needed on a regular basis. Some files could contain hundreds of pages and require system space to retain them. 2. Locate the spool file (report) to display or print. The most recent reports processed display at the bottom of the spool file list. The File name listed on this screen, is the name of the program that processes; it is not the name/number of the screen where you submitted the report from. To ensure you are working with the correct report, it may be necessary to view (5, Display) several Files until the correct report displays. See the following sections to Change printers, Hold, Delete, Display, or Release (print) a spool file (report).

5-8


June 2002


Change Printer To direct a report to print at a different printer: 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to change the printer for. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. 2. From the Work with All Spooled Files screen, type 2, Change, at the Opt field next to the File name and press Enter. The Change Spooled File Attributes screen displays: Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) Type choices, press Enter. Spooled file . . . . Job name . . . . . . User . . . . . . . Number . . . . . . Spooled file number Printer . . . . . . Print sequence . . . Form type . . . . . Copies . . . . . . . Restart printing . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

> QSYSPRT > PI1560CL > DOCMDK > 534991 > 1 *OUTQ___ *SAME *STD 1___ *STRPAGE

Name, *SELECT Name, * Name 000000-999999 1-9999, *ONLY, *LAST Name, *SAME, *OUTQ *SAME, *NEXT Form type, *SAME, *STD 1-255, *SAME Number, *SAME, *STRPAGE...

Additional Parameters Output queue . . . . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . .

DUMP QGPL

Name, *SAME, *DEV Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB



Bottom F12=Cancel

3. At the Printer field, type the Printer ID of the printer to print the report and press Field Exit, then Enter. The report is directed to the printer you specified.

June 2002


5-9


Hold a Spool File (Report) To hold the spool file (report) in the spool file: 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to place on hold. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 3


User DOCMDK DOCMDK



6=Release

Sts RDY *HLD

Total Pages 10 93

7=Messages Cur Page

Copy 1 1


F22=Printers

F24=More keys

2. At the Opt field, next to the File name, type 3, Hold and press Enter. The file Sts (status) changes to *HLD. The report will remain on hold in the spool file until you type 6, Release to release the report or 4, Delete.

5-10


June 2002


Delete a Spool File (Report) To delete the spool file (report): 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to delete. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 4


User DOCMDK DOCMDK



6=Release

Sts RDY RDY

7=Messages

Total Pages 10 93

Cur Page

Copy 1 1


2.

F22=Printers

F24=More keys

At the Opt field, next to the File name, type 4, Delete, and press Enter. More than one file can be deleted at the same time – if you have more than one file to delete, type 4 next to each file.

The Confirm Delete of Spool File(s) screen displays. Confirm Delete of Spooled Files Press Enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices. Opt 4

File QSYSPRT

User DOCMDK


User Data PI1564RG

Sts RDY

Total Pages 93

Cur Page

Copy 1

Bottom F10=View 3

F11=View 2

F12=Cancel

3. Press Enter. The spool file(s) is deleted and the Work with All Spooled Files screen displays.

June 2002


5-11


Display a Spool File (Report) To view the spool file (report): 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to display. It may be necessary to first display several files - the most recent files/reports display at the bottom of the screen. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 5 _


User DOCMDK DOCMDK



6=Release

Sts RDY RDY

7=Messages

Total Pages 10 93

Cur Page

Copy 1 1


F22=Printers

F24=More keys

2. At the Opt field, next to the File name, type 5, Display, and press Enter.

5-12


June 2002


The Display Spool File screen displays: Display Spooled File File . . . . . : PI4655RP Page/Line 1/3 Control . . . . . ________ Columns 1 - 130 Find . . . . . . _______________ *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8....+....9....+....0....+....1....+....2....+....3 PRINT DATE: 4/04/00 14:18:04 TEST MOTORS #3 PROGRAM: PI4655RG PAGE: 1 COMPANY NUMBER: 03 GUIDE FILE REPORT WRKSTN: QPADEV0056 USER: DOCMDK REQUIRED PARTS NOT AVAILABLE GROUP OTHER HI LO ON ON LAST SALE MONTHLY SALES HISTORY PART NO NO. DESCRIPTION COST CARLINE G YR YR PKG STK AVAIL ORD BKO DATE BIN MAR FEB JAN DEC NOV 274288 05875 STEM 1.13 GBPKOC 2000 1957 5 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 334671 07242 CLAMP 1.83 G P C 2000 1976 1 SP 11 0 03/16/1999 1 0 0 0 0 341953 16261 ROLLER 5.82 G OC 2000 1974 1 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 345215 04338 FITTING 6.61 GBPKOC 1995 1964 1 SP 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 356668 02335 CLAMP 3.42 GBPKOC 2000 1976 1 SP 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 363455 03616 HANGER 1.57 BPKOC 2000 1976 1 SP 11 0 03/16/1999 1 0 0 0 0 459021 00027 MOUNT MT 24.45 GBPKOC 1999 1974 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 465840 02251 SHI 1.32 G C 1993 1973 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 476574 00649 BEARING3.27 G P C 2000 1980 2 SP 0 0 0 08/22/1997 0 0 0 0 0 601261 10553 RETAINE 2.93 GBPKOC 2000 1953 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1136519 09170 COMPRESS 257.81 G OC Y 2000 1996 1 SP 0 1 0 06/16/1997 0 0 0 0 0 1252240 13095 BREAKER3.75 GBPKOC 1999 1977 1 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1381487 01745 GROMMET 3.30 GBPKOC 1993 1974 1 SP 0 1 0 32 0 0 0 0 0 1394293 04037 KIT .87 GBPKOC 1994 1974 1 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 More... F3=Exit F12=Cancel F19=Left F20=Right F24=More keys

3. Complete any of the following: •

To advance the screen forward or back, press PgUp/DgDn keys [Roll Up ↑or Roll Down keys ↓].

•

To advance the screen a specific number of detail lines, type a value at the Control field (at the top of the screen). For example, type +10 and press Enter to advance the screen 10 detail lines (type –10 to go back 10 detail lines).

•

To locate a specific word or group of words, type the word(s) at the find field and press F16. The screen advances to the word or group of word(s) you typed.

•

To shift the screen right (to view any additional information), press F20, Right.

•

To shift the screen left (to view any additional information), press F19, Left.

•

To return to the Work with All Spooled Files screen, press F12, Cancel.

June 2002


5-13


Release (Print) a Spool File (Report) To release a held spool file (report): 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, locate the file/report you want to release. Files/reports that are held display HLD in the Sts (status) column. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 6 _


User DOCMDK DOCMDK



6=Release

Sts HLD RDY

Total Pages 10 93

7=Messages Cur Page

Copy 1 1


F22=Printers

F24=More keys

2. At the Opt field, next to the File name of the held report, type 6, Release, and press Enter. The Sts display *RLS, then changes to RDY (ready) The report is ready to be printed at the printer specified for this job (or the default printer).

5-14


June 2002

DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES

DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES A system value is information that defines data and/or functions. To view any system value: 1. At a command line, type DSPSYSVAL and press F4. The Display System Value (DSPSYSVAL) screen displays: Display System Value

(DSPSYSVAL)

Type choices, press Enter. System value ................

QTIME

Output

*

QABNORMSW, QACGLVL,...(press F4 to get a list of all *, *PRINT system values

Bottom

F3=Exit

F4=Prompt

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


2. At the System value field, type the system value to view (in this example, QTIME is typed to display the system time. At the Output field, type *PRINT to print the information, or leave * to view the information. 3. Press Enter. The following information displays: Display System Value

(DSPSYSVAL)

Type choices, press Enter. System value ................ Description

Time .......................

QTIME Time of day

13:20:00

Press Enter to continue. Bottom F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

4. After reviewing the information, press F3 to exit.

! June 2002

WRKSYSVAL

command can also be used to display system value(s).


5-15

SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD

SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD This procedure copies spool files (reports) from the AS/400 to a tape cartridge. The tape cartridge can be used to create a CD of your reports. The reports on CD can be viewed and/or stored for archive purposes. This process to create the CD from tape cartridge must be coordinated with a Data Archive vendor. The EDS Automotive Retail Group does not currently support a standalone archived report viewer. This process has not been tested with all manufacturers of these products; please consult your Data Archive vendor. These instructions contain the steps to: •

Create a report storage file on the AS/400. Create a report storage file named MEREPORTS. This file is created on your system one time only. This report storage file will contain all reports you want to save during the month. After the file is copied to tape, the contents of the file on your system is cleared and used again to store the current month's reports.

•

Place Your Reports on Hold and Retrieve Spool File Information. Select the appropriate menu option and submit a report for processing. When processing is complete, locate your spool file report in the spool file and place it on Hold. Perform a screen print the following spool file information File name, Job name, User name, and job Number.

•

Copy the Held reports (spool files) into the MEREPORTS storage file. Using the screen print of the spool file information, copy each report into the MEREPORTS storage file. The steps to copy the first report spool file differ from the steps to copy subsequent report spool files. The steps to copy the first report spool also include clearing the file. Follow the steps in this section carefully.

•

Copy the MEREPORTS file to an initialized tape cartridge. To complete this step, you will need either a new/blank tape cartridge, or one that can be initialized. After the tape cartridge is initialized, the MEREPORTS storage file can be copied to the tape cartridge. A Data Archive vendor uses this tape cartridge to create the file on CD.

•

View MEREPORTS Storage File. This section includes the steps to view and verify the reports in the MEREPORTS file, on the tape cartridge

5-16


June 2002


Create the Report Storage File on the AS/400 Complete the steps in this section one time only to create the MEREPORTS storage file. After the MEREPORTS file is created on your AS/400 it does not have to be created again. The MEREPORTS report storage file will contain the reports you want to save for the current month. During the month, you will be copying spool file reports into the MEREPORTS file. At the end of the month, copy the MEREPORTS file onto a tape cartridge. The contents of the MEREPORTS file on your system is cleared when you begin to save reports for the next month. 1. At a command line, from the AS/400 Main Menu, type CRTPF

and press Enter.

The Create Physical File (CRTPF) screen displays: Create Physical File (CRTPF) Type choices, press Enter. File . . . . . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . Source file . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . Source member . . . . . . Record length, if no DDS . Generation severity level Flagging severity level . File type . . . . . . . . Member, if desired . . . . Text 'description' . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

> MEREPORTS Name > QGPL Name, *CURLIB QDDSSRC Name *LIBL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *FILE Name, *FILE > 150 Number 20 0-30 0 0-30 *DATA *DATA, *SRC *FILE Name, *FILE, *NONE > Mereports Report File Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F10=Additional parameters F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys

2. Make the following field entries: a. At the File field, type MEREPORTS and press Field Exit. b. At the Library field, type QPGL and press Field Exit. c. Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Record length, if no DDS field. Type 150 and press Field Exit. d. Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Text 'description' field. Type Month End Report File e. If Bottom displays at the bottom of the screen, press F10, Additional parameters. 3. Press Shift and Roll (Arrow Down) keys at the same time to display the next screen:

June 2002


5-17


The next screen displays: Create Physical File (CRTPF) Type choices, press Enter. Additional Parameters Source listing options . . . . . + for more values System . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expiration date for member . . . Maximum members . . . . . . . . Access path maintenance . . . . Access path recovery . . . . . . Force keyed access path . . . . Member size: Initial number of records . . Increment number of records . Maximum increments . . . . . . Allocate storage . . . . . . . .

________ _______ *LCL *NONE *NOMAX *IMMED ______ *NO


F12=Cancel

F5=Refresh

*NOMAX 1000 3 *NO

*SRC, *NOSRC, *SOURCE... *LCL, *RMT, *FILETYPE Date, *NONE Number, *NOMAX *IMMED, *DLY, *REBLD *NO, *AFTIPL, *IPL *NO, *YES 1-2147483646, *NOMAX Number Number *NO, *YES More... F13=How to use this display

4. Make the following field entries: a. Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Maximum members field, and type *NOMAX b. Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Initial number of records field, type *NOMAX and press Field Exit. c. At the Increment number of records field, type 1000 and press Field Exit. d. Press Enter. The following message displays: File MEREPORTS created in library QGPL 5. After the MEREPORTS file is created, you do not have to complete the steps in this section again. The MEREPORTS file remains on your system; the contents of the file (monthly reports) are cleared each month, after the file is copied to tape cartridge.

5-18


June 2002


Place Your Reports on Hold and Retrieve Spool File Information Repeat the steps in this section as often as necessary to place your spool file on Hold, and to screen print spool file information. 1. Create the report spool files by running any report option from any menu. Any report can be placed on Hold, as long as it produces a spool file. 2. After the report (s) have processed, place them on Hold: a. At a command line, type WRKSPLF and press Enter. The Work with All Spooled Files screen displays all spool files for your user ID. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt _ 3 _

File PI3624RP PRINT PRINT

User HOLLY HOLLY HOLLY

Device or Queue P1 P1 P1

User Data PA112 GL146 GL676

6=Release

Sts RDY HLD HLD

7=Messages

Total Pages 1 12 29

Cur Page

Copy 1 1 1 Bottom

Parameters for options 1, 2, 3 or command ===> save(*yes) F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel

• •

•

F22=Printers

F24=More keys

If More... displays in the lower right corner, press Shift and Arrow (Roll) keys at the same time to display the next screen of spool files. If necessary, verify the spool file contents to ensure you are working with the correct report: At the Opt field next to any File(s) type 5, Display, and press Enter. The report displays on the screen. If you type 5 next to more than one File, press Enter to display the next file, etc. Press F12 to return to the Work With All Spooled Files screen. Some reports are automatically placed in the spool file with a Held (HLD) status. If the spool file you want to save already displays HLD as the Status (Sts), skip step b.

b. At the Opt field, next to each spool file to Hold, type 3 and press Enter. The status (Sts) changes to *HLD. If you also want to save the spool file report to print later: At the Opt field next to each spool file to save, type 2. Press Tab until the cursor is at the command line and type SAVE(*YES) and press Enter. After these saved spool file reports are printed and/or saved to tape, they must be deleted periodically; the system does not automatically delete them.

June 2002


5-19


3. After the spool file is Held, screen print the spool file information for each report to copy: a. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen, with your the spool file displayed on the screen, press F10, View 3 b. The following spool file information displays for each spool file on the screen: File, Job, User, and Number. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt _ _ _

File PRINT PI3524RP PRINT

File Nbr 1 1 1

Job PA1120CL GL0146CL AGDSCHED


6=Release

7=Messages

Number Queue 234567 P1 310207 P1 310188 P1

Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS Bottom

Parameters for options 1, 2, 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 2 F11=View 1 F12=Cancel

F22=Printers

F24=More keys

c. Screen print this screen. You will need the File, Job, User, and Number for each spool file you want to copy into the MEREPORTS file. d. After completing all screen prints, press F12 to exit.

5-20


June 2002


Copy the Held reports (spool files) into the MEREPORTS storage file Using the screen prints from previous section, copy each report (spool file) into the MEREPORTS storage file.

WARNING: The steps to copy the FIRST report (spool file) into the MEREPORTS storage file are different than the steps to copy the remaining reports. •

Follow step 1 only for the first report you copy into the report storage file. This step contains the instructions to clear last month's reports from the file.

•

Follow step 2 to copy all subsequent reports. Repeat step 2 as many times as necessary during the month to copy reports (other than the first) into the MEREPORTS storage file.

June 2002


5-21


Warning: Step 1 contains the instructions to clear the contents of the MEREPORTS file and copy the first report of the month into the file. Complete step 1 only if: •

You have just created the report spool file and you are copying the first report spool file. Or

•

You have successfully copied the contents of the report spool file onto a tape cartridge. You are now ready to to clear the report spool file of last month's reports and copy the first report for the current month into the report spool file.

If you complete this step to copy any reports, other than the first report, you will clear the file of all reports. 1. To copy the first report (for the month) into MEREPORTS file: a. At a command line, type CPYSPLF and press F4. The Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) screen displays. Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) Type choices, press Enter. Spooled file . . . . . To data base file . . Library . . . . . . Job name . . . . . . . User . . . . . . . . Number . . . . . . . Spooled file number . To member . . . . . . Replace or add records

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .


PRINT MEREPORTS QGPL AGDSCHED HOLLY 310188 *ONLY *FIRST *REPLACE

Name Name Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, * Name 000000-999999 1-9999, *ONLY, *LAST Name, *FIRST *REPLACE, *ADD Bottom


F12=Cancel

b. For each report you want to copy, you will need the File, Job, User, and Number from the screen print of spool file information: Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt

File PRINT PRINT PRINT

File Nbr 1 1 1

Job AGDSCHED GL0146CL PA1120CL


6=Release

Number Queue 310188 P1 310207 P1 234567 P1

7=Messages



5-22

F22=Printers


F24=More keys

June 2002


c. At the Spooled file field, type the spool File name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. d. At the To data base file field, type MEREPORTS and press Field Exit. e. At the Library field, type QGPL and press Field Exit. f. At the Job name field, type the Job name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. g. At the User field, type the User name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. h. At the Number field, type the job Number (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. i. Press Tab to position the cursor at the To member field, if *FIRST does not display as the field entry, type *FIRST and press Field Exit. j. At the Replace or add records field, and type *REPLACE k. Press F10, Additional parameters. An additional field, Control character, displays at the bottom of the screen. Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) Type choices, press Enter. Spooled file . . . . . To data base file . . Library . . . . . . Job name . . . . . . . User . . . . . . . . Number . . . . . . . Spooled file number . To member . . . . . . Replace or add records

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

PRINT MEREPORTS QGPL AGDSCHED HOLLY 310188 *ONLY *FIRST *REPLACE

Name Name Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, * Name 000000-999999 1-9999, *ONLY, *LAST Name, *FIRST *REPLACE, *ADD

Additional Parameters Control character . . . . . . . F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F24=More keys

*FCFC F12=Cancel

*NONE, *FCFC, *PRTCTL... F13=How to use this display

l. At the Control character field, type *FCFC and press Enter. The following message displays at the bottom of the screen: xxxx records copied to file MEREPORTS in QGPL If any error messages display, verify all spelling on the command line; to make spelling corrections, place the cursor at the character to change and press the Insert key. Make any changes (press the Delete key to remove characters). Press Enter again.

June 2002


5-23


Warning: Complete step 2 to copy additional report spool files to the MEREPORTS file,

after the first one has already been copied using Step 1. Step 2 can be completed as many time as needed during the month to add additional spool files to the MEREPORTS file. 2. To copy additional spool file reports other than the first (for the month) into the MEREPORTS file: a. At a command line, type CPYSPLF and press F4. The Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) screen displays Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) Type choices, press Enter. Spooled file . . . . . To data base file . . Library . . . . . . Job name . . . . . . . User . . . . . . . . Number . . . . . . . Spooled file number . To member . . . . . . Replace or add records

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

PRINT MEREPORTS QGPL AGDSCHED HOLLY 310190 *ONLY *FIRST *ADD

Name Name Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, * Name 000000-999999 1-9999, *ONLY, *LAST Name, *FIRST *REPLACE, *ADD Bottom



F12=Cancel

b. For each report you want to copy, you will need the File, Job, User, and Number from the screen print of spool file information. Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt

File PRINT PRINT PRINT

File Nbr 1 1 1

Job AGDSCHED GL0146CL PA1120CL


6=Release

Number Queue 310190 P1 310207 P1 234567 P1

7=Messages



5-24

F22=Printers


F24=More keys

June 2002


At the Spooled file field, type the spool File name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. d. At the To data base file field, type MEREPORTS and press Field Exit. e. At the Library field, type QGPL and press Field Exit. f. At the Job name field, type the Job name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. g. At the User field, type the User name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. h. At the Number field, type the job Number (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. i. Press Tab to position the cursor at the To member field, if *FIRST does not display as the field entry, type *FIRST and press Field Exit.

j. At the Replace or add records field, and type *ADD k. Press F10, Additional parameters. An additional field, Control character, displays at the bottom of the screen. Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) Type choices, press Enter. Spooled file . . . . . To data base file . . Library . . . . . . Job name . . . . . . . User . . . . . . . . Number . . . . . . . Spooled file number . To member . . . . . . Replace or add records

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

PRINT MEREPORTS QGPL AGDSCHED HOLLY 310190 *ONLY *FIRST *ADD

Name Name Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, * Name 000000-999999 1-9999, *ONLY, *LAST Name, *FIRST *REPLACE, *ADD

Additional Parameters Control character

. . . . . . .

*FCFC

*NONE, *FCFC, *PRTCTL... More...


F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


m. At the Control character field, type *FCFC and press Enter. The command displays on the command line. The following message displays at the bottom of the screen: xxxx records copied to file MEREPORTS in QGPL If any error messages display, verify all spelling on the command line; to make corrections, place the cursor at the character to change and press the Insert key. Make any changes (press the Delete key to remove characters). Press Enter again.

June 2002


5-25


Copy the MEREPORTS file to an Initialized Tape Cartridge To complete this step, you will need either a new/blank tape cartridge, or one that can be initialized. Complete this step to initialize a tape cartridge, then copy the MEREPORTS storage file from the AS/400 to tape cartridge. The tape cartridge can be used to create a CD of your reports. The reports on CD can be viewed and/or stored for archive purposes. To Initialize a tape cartridge for the MEREPORTS file: 1. Insert a tape cartridge into the tape drive. 2. At a command line, type INZTAP DEV(TC) NEWVOL(your facility name) CHECK(*NO) and press Enter. Note: If you have a RISC processor, (Operating System is V3R7M0 or higher), type:

INZTAP DEV(TC) NEWVOL(your facility name) CHECK(*NO) DENSITY(CTGTYPE)

Copy the MEREPORTS file onto the tape cartridge 1. Ensure the initialized tape is in the tape drive. 2. At a command line, type CPYTOTAP and press F4. The Copy To Tape (CPYTOTAP) screen displays Copy To Tape (CPYTOTAP) Type choices, press Enter. From file . . . . . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . . Tape file . . . . . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . . From member . . . . . . . . . . File sequence number . . . . . . Tape label . . . . . . . . . . . Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . + for more values Copy to reels: Label processing type . . . . Record length . . . . . . . . . End of tape option . . . . . . .

'

5-26


> MEREPORTS > QGPL > QTAPE *LIBL *FIRST *TAPF *FROMMBR > TC

Name Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, generic*, *FIRST, *ALL 1-9999, *TAPF, *END

> *SL > 150 > *REWIND

*TAPF, *SL, *NL, *LTM Number, *TAPF, *CALC... *TAPF, *REWIND, *UNLOAD...

Name, *TAPF


More... F12=Cancel


June 2002


3. Make the following field entries: a. At the From file field, type MEREPORTS b. At the Library field, type QPGL

and press Field Exit.


c. At the Tape file field, type QTAPE and press Field Exit. d. Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Device field. Type TC and press Field Exit. (If the tape device is not TC, type the correct Device ID.) e. At the Label processing type field, type *SL f. At the Record length field, type 150



g. At the End of tape option field, type *REWIND h. Press F10, Additional parameters. The next Copy To Tape screen displays: Copy To Tape (CPYTOTAP) Type choices, press Enter. Additional Parameters Volume identifier . + for Block length . . . . Record block type . File expiration date Number of records to Data compaction . . F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys

. . . . . . more values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copy . . . . . . . . . F5=Refresh

> *NONE

Character value, *TAPF, *NONE

> 15000 > *FB *TAPF *END > *NO

1-32767, *TAPF, *CALC *TAPF, *F, *FB, *V, *VB... Date, *TAPF, *PERM Number, *END *TAPF, *NO

F12=Cancel


Press Shift and Arrow (Roll) Up keys at the same time to display the additional fields.

4. Make the following field entries: a. At the Volume identifier field, press Tab. b. At the Block length field, type 15000


c. At the Record block type field, type *FB


d. At the File expiration date, type *TAPF and press Field Exit. e. At the Number of records to copy field, type *END f. At the Data compaction field, type *NO


and press Enter.

5. The MEREPORT file is copied to the tape cartridge. •

If any error messages display, verify all spelling on the command line. To make corrections, place the cursor at the character to change and press the Insert key. Make any changes (press the Delete key to remove characters). Press Enter again.

6. Remove the tape from the tape drive and label the tape cartridge

June 2002


5-27


View MEREPORTS File Complete the steps in this section to view the number of records copied to the MEREPORTS file and to view a print list of MEREPORTS file names: If you have been keeping track of the total number of records copied each time you copied a spool file into MEREPORT, compare that number to the number listed in the file: To verify the total nummber of records copied: 1. At a command line type DSPPFM FILE(MEREPORTS) and press Enter. 2. The report file displays. The number of records in the file displays in the upper right corner of the screen. Verify this number with the total number of records copied each time you copied a spool file into MEREPORT. 3. To move through the report file: •

Press the PageUp and PageDown or Shift and Roll (Arrow Up/Down)

•

To display the bottom of the file, type B at the Control field (top left of screen) and press Enter. To display the top of the file, type T at the Control field (top left of screen) and press Enter.

•

To locate specific characters, type the characters to find at the Find field (top left of screen) and press Enter.

To print a listing of the file names on the tape cartridge: 1. Ensure the tape cartridge is in the tape drive. 2

At a command line, type: SBMJOB CMD(DSPTAP DEV(TC) DATA(*SAVRST) OUTPUT(*PRINT)) JOB(DSPMICROTP) and press Enter.

5-28


June 2002


MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE 1.

What steps did you use to determine the DEALERLINE release on your AS/400? _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________

2.

What steps do you use to determine the system date? _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________

3.

If a device is varied off, the cursor will be in the upper: _____ A. _____ B.

4.

The command used to list devices attached to the AS/400 is: _____ _____ _____ _____

5.

Left hand corner Right hand corner

A. B. C. D.

LSTDEVATCH PRTDEVADR WRKHDWPRD CRTDEVATCLST

The easiest command to use to vary on a device is: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

June 2002

A. B. C. D. E.

VARYON PRTDEVADR WRKHDWPRD WRKDEVD WRKCFGSTS


5-29


Solutions to Miscellaneous System Functions - Exercise 1. From any command line, type VER and press Enter, or from the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000), type 23 DEALERLINE Version, and press Enter. 2. From any command line, type DSPSYSVAL and press F4, define the system value as QDATE and press Enter. 3. A. 4. B. 5. E.

5-30


June 2002

6

Printer Top of Form/Tear Off Table of Contents

Printer Top of Form/Tear Off ........................................................ 1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 1 DFX5000 EPSON PRINTER ......................................................... 2 LEXMARK 2380/2381/2390/2391 PRINTER CONTINUOUS FORM FEED PAPER .................................................................... 3 LEXMARK 2381/2391 PRINTER - SALESLINE............................ 4 EPSON FX1050/FX850 ................................................................. 5 4224/4226 PRINTER..................................................................... 6 4227 PRINTER.............................................................................. 7 IBM 4230/4232 PRINTER ............................................................. 8 AMT 535 - SALESLINE................................................................. 9 FUJITSU DL4400/DL4600/DL5800/DL6400 - SALESLINE ........ 10

April 2000

Printer Top of Form/Tear OffTear Off

6-i

Table of Contents

6-ii


April 2000

OVERVIEW

Printer Top of Form/Tear Off OVERVIEW This chapter contains the instructions to load paper, set the top of a form, and to set the form tear-off for various printers.

April 2000

Printer Top of Form/Tear Off

6-1

DFX5000 EPSON PRINTER

DFX5000 EPSON PRINTER • To load paper: 1.

Press On-line to take the printer offline.

2.

Press Front/Rear to select the front or rear of the printer.

3.

Secure the form in the paper guide flaps (tractor feed).

4.

Press Line Feed - Load.

• To Set Top of Form: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Make sure the printer is off-line. (If the printer is on-line, press On-Line to take the printer offline.) Press Front/Rear to unload the paper (paper out light will be on). Press Front/Rear to re-load paper. Press Top of Form (you will hear one beep). Verify the Top of Form light is flashing. (If the Top of Form light is not flashing, return to step 2.) Press Micro Feed up or down to adjust the top of the form as needed. Usually the top perforation on the first form is even with the ribbon guide. Press Top of Form to set the top of form (you will hear two beeps and the Top of Form light will go out). Press On-line to put the printer on-line. Print the report or invoice.

!

The DFX5000 retains both the front and the rear top of form settings even if the printer is powered off.

• To Set Tear Off

! 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6-2

Never Set Tear Off until the Top of Form is correct.

Make sure the printer is offline. Press Tear Off (the form will go to tear off). Press Micro Feed up or down to adjust tear off. DO NOT tear the form off. Press Tear Off (the printer will return to top of form). Press On-Line to put the printer on-line.


April 2000

LEXMARK 2380/2381/2390/2391 PRINTER CONTINUOUS FORM FEED PAPER

LEXMARK 2380/2381/2390/2391 PRINTER CONTINUOUS FORM FEED PAPER • Set Top of Form 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Press Alt + Park Load keys to unload the paper (paper-out light will go on). Press Alt + Park Load keys to reload paper. Verify Ready light is flashing. Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn keys to adjust top of form. Usually the top perforation of the first form is even with the ribbon guide. Press Start/Stop key to set top of form (Ready light is solid). Print the report or invoice.

• Set Tear Off

!


1.

After the form has printed and the Top of Form is correct, and the Tear Off is still wrong, do NOT unload the paper – continue to step 2.

2.

Press Start/Stop keys to take the printer offline (Ready light is off).

3.

Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn keys to adjust tear off.

4.

Press Start/Stop keys to set tear off (Ready light is solid).

Or 1.

Press Alt + Park Load keys to unload the paper (paper-out light will go on).

2.

Press Alt + Park Load keys to reload the paper (Ready light will blink).

3.

Press Alt + Tear Off (Ready light is off).

4.

Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn keys to adjust tear off.

5.

Press Start/Stop keys to set tear off (Ready light is solid).

April 2000


6-3

LEXMARK 2381/2391 PRINTER - SALESLINE

LEXMARK 2381/2391 PRINTER - SALESLINE • Top of Form (Sheet

Feeder for Forms - SALESLINE)

1.

Load a sheet of paper (Ready light is solid).

2.

Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn keys to adjust the paper at top of form. The default position is even with the platen bar.

3.

Press ALT and Set TOF. This saves your Top of Form.

There is no Tear Off for cut sheets.

6-4


April 2000

EPSON FX1050/FX850

EPSON FX1050/FX850 • To set Top of Form: 1.

Press On-line to take the printer offline.

2.

Press Load/Eject button to unload the paper (paper-out light goes on).

3.

Press Load/Eject button to load the paper.

4.

Press On-Line button; the on-line button flashes.

5.

Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn (form and line feed buttons) to adjust top of form. Usually the top perforation of the first form is even with the ribbon guide.

6.

Print the report or invoice.

• Set Tear Off

!


1.

After the report/invoice prints, DO NOT press On-line button. The On-line button must be flashing to set tear off.

2.

If the tear off is incorrect, press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn (form and line feed buttons) to adjust tear off.

3.

Tear off the form.

April 2000


6-5

4224/4226 PRINTER

4224/4226 PRINTER • Set Top of Form 1.

If forms are already loaded, tear off the forms at the perforation and press Load/Unload to retract the forms to the tractor position.

2.

Press Load/Unload to load the forms again. The Ready indicator is blinking after loading the forms; the printer is not ready yet.

3.

Press Micro Dn, Micro Up, or Line Feed to adjust the top of form as needed. Usually the top perforation on the first form is even with the ribbon guide.

4.

Press Start/Stop. The current position of the form is saved as the top of form and the alarm sounds.

5.


• Set Tear Off

!


1.

If forms are already loaded, tear off the forms at the perforation and press Load/Unload to retract the forms to the tractor position.

2.

Press Load/Unload to load the forms again.

3.

Press Tear Off to position the perforation within 25 mm (1 inch) of the tear bar.

4.

Press Micro Dn or Micro Up to align the perforation with the tear bar.

!

Micro Up and Micro Dn moves the forms in 0.35 mm (1/72 inch) increments or decrements

5. Press Start/Stop. The current position is saved as the tear off and the alarm sounds. The printer retracts the form to top of form.

6-6


April 2000

4227 PRINTER

4227 PRINTER • Set Top of Form 1.

Press Menu.

2.

SET TOP OF FORM displays in the window.

3.

Press Micro Dn, or Micro Up, to adjust the top of form as needed. (Usually the top perforation on the first form is even with the ribbon guide.)

4.

Press Store, to save the new Top of Form position.

5.

The Ready light comes on solid.

• Set Tear Off

!


1.

After the form has printed and the Top of Form is correct, and the Tear Off is still wrong, do NOT unload the paper – continue to step 2.

2.

Press Start/Stop to take the printer offline.

3.

Press Micro ↓ or Micro ↑ to align the perforation with the tear bar.

4. Press Start/Stop. The current position is saved as the tear off and the printer beeps two times. The paper rolls backward, then goes to the new tear off position. 5.

The Ready light comes on solid.

April 2000


6-7

IBM 4230/4232 PRINTER

IBM 4230/4232 PRINTER • Set Top of Form 1.

Press Stop. The printer displays NOT READY.

2.

Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn, and/or Line Feed keys to adjust top of form. (Usually the top perforation of the first form is even with the ribbon guide.)

3.

Press Set Top of Form key to set top of form. The alarm sounds and the printer displays Top of Form Set.

4.


• Set Tear Off

!


1.

Press Load/Eject. The printer displays Form Ejected. Press Load and the Ready indicator goes off. The form quickly advances to the tear off position.

2.

Open the acoustic cover.

3.

Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn or Line Feed keys to adjust tear off.

4.

Tear off form.

5.

Press Load/Eject and the next form will advance to top of form. Ready indicator is on.

6-8


April 2000

AMT 535 - SALESLINE

AMT 535 - SALESLINE • Set Top of Form (Sheet Feeder for Forms – SALESLINE) These steps should only be completed for a New Printer Setup. 1.

End the printer [WRKWTR].

2.

Power Off the printer. (The power switch is located in the back, lower right side.)

3.

Hold the ALT button and keep it depressed.

4.

Power On the printer.

5.

Release the ALT button.

6.

Press the Setup button. OPERATIONS displays in the LED panel.

7.

Turn the Tumbler until the last option is reached (usually #54 or #56).

8.

Hold the FONT + QUALITY buttons. While keeping the FONT + QUALITY buttons depressed, move the tumbler until P_SNSR displays (this sets the top of form). DO NOT release the FONT + QUALITY buttons.

9.

While holding down the FONT + QUALITY buttons, press and hold the ALT button [ALT+FONT+QUALITY].

10. Turn the Tumbler until setting –7 displays. 11. Release the ALT+FONT+QUALITY buttons. 12. Turn the Tumbler to menu option #2 (SAVE). a.

Press the ALT button and keep it depressed.

b.

Move the Tumbler to the first setting (FORMS).

c.

Release the ALT button.

d.

The printer beeps and the setting are saved.

13. Power Off, then Power On the printer to enable the lock-out feature. 14. Start the printer [WRKWTR].

• There is no Tear Off for cut sheets

!

April 2000

The LED panel should display FORMS READY. If FACTORY READY displays in the LED panel, press the ALT button and keep it depressed, then press Top of Form button two times. FORMS READY should display in the LED panel.


6-9

FUJITSU DL4400/DL4600/DL5800/DL6400 - SALESLINE

FUJITSU DL4400/DL4600/DL5800/DL6400 - SALESLINE These Fujitsu printers are used for SALESLINE Forms. There is no setting for Top of Form. If the Top of Form is incorrect, the menu setting needs to be checked. Please call the EDS Customer Support Center – select the prompts for AS/400 Hardware.

6-10


April 2000

7

AS/400 Work Management Concepts Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 2 AS/400 CONTROL LANGUAGE STRUCTURE ............................ 3 LIBRARIES ................................................................................... 6 SUBSYSTEMS.............................................................................. 6 Job Process Flow..................................................................... 7 Job Queues.............................................................................. 7 PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW...................................................... 8 Twinax Attached Printer Troubleshooting................................. 9 TCP/IP Printer Troubleshooting ............................................. 11 HELP........................................................................................... 13 AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS - EXERCISE ........ 14 AS/400 Control Language Structure ...................................... 14 Libraries ................................................................................. 16 Subsystems ........................................................................... 17 Print Jobs ............................................................................... 19 Help ....................................................................................... 20

August 2000

AS/400 Work Management Concepts

7-i

OVERVIEW

AS/400 Work Management Concepts OVERVIEW This chapter includes the following topics: •

AS/400 Control Language Structure - Command Format - Command Name - Parameter(s)

•

Libraries - IBM (System) Libraries - DEALERLINE XL (User) Libraries - Library List

•

Subsystems - Identify the IBM Subsystems - Job Queues

•

Print Job Process and Flow - Spool Files - Output Queues - Writers

•

Help - Cursor Location - Select a Command - Display Commands

August 2000


7-2

AS/400 CONTROL LANGUAGE STRUCTURE

AS/400 CONTROL LANGUAGE STRUCTURE The AS/400 Control Language or commands are used to interface with the AS/400 to perform functions such as monitoring the system, performing backups and configuring the system. Commands are typed at a command line. Command lines display at the bottom of some menus.

COMMAND FORMAT

COMMAND NAME

VERB

PARAMETER(S)

OBJECT

PROMPTING (F4)

KEYWORD NOTATION

POSITIONAL NOTATION

COMMAND FORMAT The AS/400 command format consists of a command name (general function) and parameter(s). COMMAND FORMAT = COMMAND NAME + PARAMETER(S)

COMMAND NAME A command name is a general function that consists of a verb and object. COMMAND NAME = Verb + Object The Verb defines the action. The Object identifies what the action is to be performed on.

August 2000


7-3


Function

Verb

Object

Command Name

Create User Profile

CRT

USRPRF

CRTUSRPRF

Change Password Display Tape Work with Job Queues

CHG DSP WRK

PWD TAP JOBQ

CHGPWD DSPTAP WRKJOBQ

Initialize a Tape

INZ TAP

INZTAP

Work with Writer

WRK

WTR

WRKWTR

Work with Spool Files

WRK

SPLF

WRKSPLF

PARAMETERS(S) Parameters further define/limit the functionality of a command. Parameters for a command can be specified in one of three ways:

1. PROMPTING [F4] For example, at a command line, type WRKUSRPRF and press F4 The Work with User Profiles (WRKUSRPRF) screen displays. Work with User Profiles (WRKUSRPRF) Type choices, press Enter. User Profile.......................................JSMITH



NAME,GENERIC*,*ALL

Bottom F12=Cancel

At the User Profile field, type the User ID to update and press Enter. The Work with User Profiles screen displays. Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 12=Work with objects by owner Opt ___ ___

User Profile ___________ JSMITH

5=Display

Text John Smith - Salesperson

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 or command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F17=Position to F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys

At the Opt field, next to the User Profile, type the appropriate option (for example, 2 to Change a user profile) and press Enter.

!

7-4

To display all User Profiles, at a command line, type press Enter.


WRKUSRPRF

*ALL and

August 2000


2.

KEYWORD NOTATION This requires that you type the command, the keyword that identified the parameter, and the parameter. For example,

3.

WRKJOBQ

JOBQ(QBATCH)

and press Enter.

POSITIONAL NOTATION This requires that you type the command and all the parameters in proper order with correct spacing and punctuation. For example, WRKSPLF *ALL and press Enter. Multiple Value Symbols •

More... Indicates more than one screen of information. Press Shift + Arrow Up simultaneously to display the next screen. You can also press F10 at some command screens to define additional parameters.

•

Asterisk * If the asterisk follows the word "generic," it is used to specify one or more generic names for a group of objects. An asterisk also identifies system-defined parameters when it precedes a parameter value. For example,

WRKWTR

P*

or

WRKCFGSTS *DEV W*

•

Plus Sign + Allows additional entry fields to be used to define.

•

Ellipsis ... Gives a complete listing of valid system parameters. To display all possible field entries, press F4 with the cursor positioned at the field.

August 2000


7-5

LIBRARIES

LIBRARIES A library acts as a directory to group similar objects. To see a list of the libraries assigned to your user profile on your computer, type DSPLIBL (Display Library List). To display all libraries, type DSPLIB *ALL There are two types of libraries: •IBM (system) Libraries These contain operating system software and information required to operate the AS/400. IBM Libraries are prefixed with Q. QSYS

System Library - Contains all operating system software and user profiles

QHLPSYS

Help Text Library - Contains help text data used when you press Help key [F1 key is the Help key for a PC keyboard]

QUSRSYS

Security Library - Contains message and output queues

QGPL

General Purpose Library - Contains miscellaneous information and IBM programs

•DEALERLINE XL (user) Libraries These are application libraries purchased by a retail facility that allow them to complete each task listed. The following is a list of several DEALERLINE libraries. DBLIBR

Data Base Library - All data files that make each computer system unique to the dealership or retail facility. This is the library saved during the nightly backup. BUSINESSLINE XL Library GM DCS400 Library Leasing Library GMAC MAPS Payroll Library Temporary Fixes Library - Contains program updates until they are permanently placed in programs with a new release PARTSLINE XL Library RAPID400 Library System Administration Library - Used with programs to complete DEALERLINE XL security and backups SALESLINE XL Library SERVICELINE XL V1 Merchandising Library SERVICLEINE XL V2 Library SERVICELINE XL Scheduling Library

BLLIBR DCLIBR LELIBR MPLIBR PALIBR PFLIBR PRLIBR RALIBR SALIBR SLLIBR SMLIBR SVLIBR SSLIBR

SUBSYSTEMS A subsystem is an independent environment with its own allocated resources where work is performed. Examples of AS/400 subsystems: DLCOMMSBS EZFORMS PRINTSBS QBATCH

7-6

-

where communication polling jobs are processed. area in computer that EZFORMS monitors are processed. where all parts and service print jobs are processed area to process jobs in background and allow the terminal to be used for other functions while the processing occurs


August 2000

SUBSYSTEMS

QCMN QCTL QINTER QSPL

-

where communication jobs are processed location where system console functions where all interactive jobs, except the system console, process area in computer that processes print jobs

Job Process Flow JOB QUEUE

SUBSYSTEM

Job Queues A job queue is a holding area for all jobs, usually batch jobs, prior to processing in a subsystem. Subsystem The area a job is processed in. Which subsystem jobs are processed in depends on the type of job and its own internal requirements and parameters, for example, BUSINESSLINE XL Month-End procedure processes in QBATCH or SERVICELINE XL Daily Cutoff procedure processes in QBATCH. If you were to inquire on a check in BUSINESSLINE, the inquiry would process in QINTER.

August 2000


7-7

PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW

PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW SPOOL FILE

OUTPUT QUEUE

WRITER

PRINTER

Spool File A spool file is a print job generated by the computer system within This is a synonym for a print job or listing, e.g., print screen.

one of the subsystems just discussed.

Output Queue An output queue is a holding area for spool files prior to being printed on the printer. Print jobs are removed from this area on a FIFO (first-in, first-out) basis. Writer A writer is an IBM program that reads a spool file from an output queue and sends it to a printer. Printer Hardware device that prints the spool file.

Before the job can print, the output queue, writer, and printer must all be started and communicating with each other. To make this task easier, IBM has each area named the same. For instance, printer P1 has its print jobs delivered by writer P1 from output queue P1.

7-8


August 2000


Twinax Attached Printer Troubleshooting One of the most common problems is losing your printout. To assist you, here are a list of questions that will walk you through troubleshooting twinax attached printer problems. Look at the printer • Is the power on? • Is the printer on-line? • Is the paper loaded? • Is the paper jammed? • • • • • • • •

Use command WRKWTR Is the writer started? Is the writer held? Is the writer in MSGW? Is the writer ended? Use command WRKOUTQ Is the OUTQ held? Use command WRKSPLF Is the spool file held? Is the spool file in MSGW? Is the spool file complete?

Use command WRKWTR At a command line, type WRKWTR and press Enter to display all printers: Work with All Printers Type options, press Enter. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release 7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue

Sts

Opt Device Sep Form Type File User User Data _ P1 STR *FILE *ALL _ P2 STR *FILE *ALL _ P3 END _ P4 END _ P5 END _ P6 END _ P7 END _ P8 STR *FILE *ALL _ P9 STR *FILE *ALL _ P10 END _ P11 END More... Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=More keys

•

Is the writer started? (STR would display in the Sts field)

•

Is the writer held? (HLD would display in the Sts field)

•

Is the writer in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field)

•

Is the writer ended? (END would display in the Sts field)

August 2000


7-9


Use command WRKOUTQ At a command line, type WRKOUTQ and press Enter to work with all output queues: Work with All Output Queues Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 9=Work with Writers 14=Clear Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Queue PS DMOUTQ DUMP EZFORMS QDKT QIPDSPRT QLINEPRT QOAGEORT QPFROUTQ QPJOBLOG QPRINT QPRINTS

5=Work with

Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS

Files 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0

6=Release

8=Description

Status

Writer

RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS

More. . . Command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Promt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F24=More keys

•

Is the OUTQ held? (HLD would display in the Status field)

Use command WRKSPLF At a command line, type WRKSPLF

*ALL and press Enter to work with all user spool files.

Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status

6=Release

Device or Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

File

User

Queue

QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QPDSPSBJ QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QPRINT

THOMAS THOMAS WAKEFIEL NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI MCCALLUM

P1 P1 P1 P5 P3 P2 P1 P4 P4 P5

User Data

C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 CMS101RG

Sts RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY

7=Messages

Total

Cur

Pages

Page

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 110

Copy

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 More...

Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys

•

Is the spool file held? (HLD would display in the Sts field)

•

Is the spool file in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field)

•

Is the spool file complete? (The spool file would be completed; OPN would display in the Sts field if the file was still being processed)

7-10


August 2000


TCP/IP Printer Troubleshooting One of the most common problems is losing your printout. To assist you, here are a list of questions that will walk you through troubleshooting TCP/IP printer problems. Look at the printer • Is the power on? • Is the printer on-line? • Is the paper loaded? • Is the paper jammed?

• • • •

Use command WRKWTR *ALL

Is the writer started? Is the writer held? Is the writer in MSGW? Is the writer ended?

Use command WRKOUTQ

•

Is the OUTQ held?

Use command WRKSPLF

• • •

Is the spool file held? Is the spool file in MSGW? Is the spool file complete?

Use command WRKWTR *ALL At a command line, type WRKWTR and press Enter to display all printers: Work with All Writers Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with output queue Opt

Writer BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE

Type

5=Work with

Device RMT RMT RMT RMT PRT FV RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT

6=Release

Queue BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE

7=Display messages

Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS

Parameters for options 2, 3, 4, 6 or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F22=Start printer writer

•

Status STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR

Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL More...

F24=More keys

Does the Writer ID (Printer ID) display? If the Printer ID does NOT display, at a command line, type STRRMTWTR *ALL and press Enter. STRRMTWTR xx (xx=Printer ID) or STRRMTWTR *ALL can be used to start a TCP/IP printer.

•


•


•


August 2000


7-11


Use command WRKOUTQ At a command line, type WRKOUTQ and press Enter to work with all output queues: Work with All Output Queues Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 9=Work with Writers 14=Clear Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Queue PS DMOUTQ DUMP EZFORMS QDKT QIPDSPRT QLINEPRT QOAGEORT QPFROUTQ QPJOBLOG QPRINT QPRINTS

5=Work with

Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS

Files 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0

6=Release

8=Description

Status

Writer


More. . . Command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Promt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F24=More keys

•

Is the OUTQ held? (HLD would display in the Status field)

Use command WRKSPLF At a command line, type WRKSPLF

*ALL and press Enter to work with all user spool files.

Work with All Spooled Files Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status

Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

File

User

Device or Queue

QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QPDSPSBJ QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QPRINT

THOMAS THOMAS WAKEFIEL NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI MCCALLUM

P1 P1 P1 P5 P3 P2 P1 P4 P4 P5

User Data

C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 CMS101RG

6=Release

Sts RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY

7=Messages

Total Pages

Cur Page

1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 110

Copy

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 More...

Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys

•

Is the spool file held? (HLD would display in the Sts field)

•

Is the spool file in Message Waiting (MSGW would display in the Sts field)

•

Is the spool file complete? (The spool file would be completed; OPN would display in the Sts field if the file was still being processed.)

7-12


August 2000

HELP

HELP Assistance is available in many forms on the AS/400 that we will discuss. In addition, the level of help text assistance may also be defined in the system values. You have a choice of basic, intermediate, or advanced. The EDS default is the intermediate help level. Help from the AS/400 on the operating system can be obtained in any of the following ways: Cursor Location:

Place the cursor where help is desired and press Help or from a PC, press F1.

Select a Command:

Type in the command SLTCMD *ALL and press Enter to initiate the process of listing all commands

Display a Command:

Type GO CMDxxx (xxx=command verb) and press Enter to initiate the listing of commands on the system. Example: GO CMDWRK and press Enter lists all of the work commands

August 2000


7-13

AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS - EXERCISE

AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS - EXERCISE AS/400 Control Language Structure 1.

The AS/400 control language is an alternative to using the AS/400 Menus and options. _____ True _____ False

2.

Name 5 common verb acronyms used in a command name. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

3.

Parameters may be system-defined or user-defined. _____ True _____ False

4.

A system-defined parameter for a command begins with: _____ A. Asterisk (*) _____ B. Q _____ C. None of the above

5.

Required or most commonly updated parameters are usually listed first on

the prompt screen.

_____ True _____ False 6.

Typing a command in positional notation requires the parameters to be in

sequential order.

_____ True _____ False

7. At a prompt screen, if you see "...." following the list of possible values for a the entire list, move your cursor to that field and press: _____ _____ _____ _____ 8.

A. B. C. D.

parameter, to see

F9 F3 F4 Help

At a prompt screen, if you want to view "Additional parameters," press: _____ A. F10 _____ B. F4

7-14


August 2000


_____ C. F9 9.

10.

Match the command components with their definition. 1 - Verb

_____

Specifications or limitations to a command

2 - Object

_____

Action to be performed

3 - Parameter

_____

What the action is to be performed on

What key must be pressed to display a command's prompt screen? _____ A. Help _____ B. F4 _____ C. Enter

August 2000


7-15


Libraries 1.

What is the name of the IBM AS/400 System Library? _____ A. #LIBRARY _____ B. QSYS _____ C. QUSRSYS

2.

What is the name of the library that contains the IBM operating system? _____ A. QSYS _____ B. DBLIBR _____ C. SALIBR

3.

What is the name of the library that contains all the DEALERLINE XL data files? _____ A. QSYS _____ B. DBLIBR _____ C. SALIBR

4.

What command would you use to display the complete library list? ____________________

5.

What is the name of the library that is backed up daily? _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

7-16

A. B. C. D. E.

QSYS DBLIBR All system libraries All application libraries All system and application libraries


August 2000


Subsystems 1.

Which subsystem does the system console (W1) operate in? _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

2.

QINTER QBATCH QCTL QSPL QCMN QSNADS

Which subsystem do interactive sessions other than the system console process in? _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

3.

A. B. C. D. E. F.

A. B. C. D. E. F.


Batch jobs require one-on-one interaction between the user and the AS/400. _____ True _____ False

4.

A batch job will lock up the workstation until the job is done. _____ True _____ False

5.

A job queue is a holding area for: _____ Batch jobs _____ Spool jobs

6.

What subsystem does a BUSINESSLINE XL batch process in? _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

7.

A. B. C. D. E. F.


If a batch job is processing, where is it? _____ A. Subsystem _____ B. Job Queue _____ C. Output Queue

8.

If a batch job is waiting to be processed, where is it?

August 2000


7-17


_____ A. Subsystem _____ B. Job Queue _____ C. Output Queue

7-18


August 2000


Print Jobs 1.

What is another name for a print job? _____ A. Output Queue _____ B. Writer _____ C. Spool File

2.

A writer must be assigned to an output queue for the spool files in the output queue to actually print. _____ True _____ False

3.

Spool files are removed one at a time from an output queue following which

principle?

_____ A LIFO - Last In First Out _____ B. FIFO - First In First Out 4.

A spool file goes to a writer before it goes to an output queue. _____ True _____ False

5.

A writer is an IBM program that reads spool files from an output queue and sends them to a printer. _____ True _____ False

6.

If a print job is waiting to be processed, where is it? _____ A. Subsystem _____ B. Job Queue _____ C. Output Queue

August 2000


7-19


Help 1.

Pressing the Help key (or F1 from a PC keyboard) can provide detailed information for the following: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

2.

A. B. C. D. E. F.

Error messages Commands Parameters Menus Display screens All of the above

To display Help explaining the entire screen, move the cursor to the: _____ A. Screen title and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard _____ B. Any field and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard _____ C. Error message and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard

3.

To display Help explaining an error message, move the cursor to the message and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard. _____ True _____ False

4.

List the steps to execute the following? Display all the 'WRK' commands

7-20

____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________


August 2000


Solutions to AS/400 Work Management Concepts Exercise AS/400 Control Language Structure 1. True. Either commands or menus will work, but if you remember them, commands will allow you to work faster. 2.

WRK – work DSP – display CHG – change SAV – save STR – start ADD - add

CRT - create INZ - initialize DLT - delete PRT - print RST - restore

3.

True

4.

A. Asterisk (*)

5.

True

6.

True

7.

C. F4

8.

A. F10

9.

1 = Action to be performed 2 = What the action is to be performed on 3 = Specifications or limitations to a command B. F4

10.

Libraries 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B. A. B. B.

QSYS QSYS DBLIBR DSPLIBL DBLIBR

August 2000


7-21


Subsystems 1. C. 2. A. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 7. 8.

QCTL QINTER False False Batch Jobs QBATCH Subsystem Job Queue

Print Jobs 1. C. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C.

Spool file True FIFO, First In First Out False True Output Queue

Help 1. F. 2. A. 3. 4.

7-22

All of the above Screen title and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard True At any command line, type GO CMDWRK and press Enter.


August 2000

8

Messages Table of Contents

OVERVIEW..................................................................................... 1 TYPES OF MESSAGES ................................................................. 2 MESSAGE QUEUES ...................................................................... 3 SEND MESSAGES ......................................................................... 4 Send a Message to a User ID(s) ................................................... 4 Send a Message to a Workstation ID(s) ........................................ 5 Send a Message to a User ID with a Reply Line............................ 6 Send a Message to a Workstation ID(s) with a Reply Line ............ 7 Reply to Messages ........................................................................ 8 Display Messages ......................................................................... 9 Display messages for a user ID(s)................................................. 9 Display Messages for a Workstation ID(s)................................... 10 Display System Messages........................................................... 11 Display System Operator Messages/Help for System Messages 12 Display Messages from the WRKWTR screen ............................ 13 DELETE MESSAGES................................................................... 14 MESSAGES - EXERCISES .......................................................... 15

August 2000

Messages

8-i

Table of Contents


8-ii


August 2000

OVERVIEW

Messages OVERVIEW •

Types of Messages - Personal Messages - System Messages

•

Message Queues - Types of Message Queues - Delivery Mode

•

Send Messages - To a specific User ID(s) or Workstation ID(s) - With a reply line for the receiver to respond - Reply to messages

•

Display Messages - For a specific User ID(s) or Workstation ID(s) - System Messages - From the System Activity Command Screen - Getting Help for System Messages

•

Delete Messages

August 2000

Messages

8-1

TYPES OF MESSAGES

TYPES OF MESSAGES There are two general types of messages: personal and system. •

Personal messages give the users the ability to communicate with each other via the computer.

•

System messages are messages sent by the computer to the user.

8-2


August 2000

MESSAGE QUEUES

MESSAGE QUEUES A message queue is a holding area for messages. There are three types of Message Queues: • • •

User ID Message Queues Workstation Message Queues System Operator Message Queue (QSYSOPR)

MESSAGE QUEUES

USER ID

WORKSTATION

Contains Personal Messages Sent to User

Contains Personal Messages Sent to Workstation

QSYSOPR

Contains System Messages

Message queues are named for user ID's, workstation ID's or QSYSOPR (system operator). Delivery Mode The delivery mode specifies how the AS/400 will interface with the message queue regarding messages. There are three basic delivery modes: •

*BREAK - interrupts current processing

•

*NOTIFY - sets off alarm and message symbol on terminal (commonly used)

•

*HOLD - sent to message queue with no notification

!

August 2000

A message being sent, can only be received by the user or workstation the message is sent to, if the user is signed onto the workstation. Even a BREAK message will not break on a Sign On screen; a user MUST be signed onto a workstation.

Messages

8-3

SEND MESSAGES

SEND MESSAGES Messages can be sent to or displayed from any user ID or workstation.

Send a Message to a User ID(s) 1.

At a command line, type SNDMSG

(SEND MESSAGE) and press F4.

Send Message (SNDMSG) Type choices, press Enter. Message text . . . . . . . . . . > Pat, I will be out of the office this afternoon. Please stop by before 2:00. We will discuss next weeks schedule__________________ ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ To user profile . . . . . . . .

PSMITH______

Name, *SYSOPR, *ALLACT...

Additional Parameters To message queue . . . . . . . . > Friend Library . . . . . . . . . . . *LIBL + for more values _________

Name, *SYSOPR Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Message type . . . . . . . . . .

*INFO, *INQ

*INFO

More. . . ===> F3=Exit keys

F4=Prompt

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


F24=More

2.

Type the Message.

3.

At the To user profile field, type the user ID of the person to receive the message, and press Enter. The message is sent.

4.

Press F3 to exit.

!

8-4

To display the Additional Parameters press F10 at the Send Message screen.


August 2000

SEND MESSAGES

Send a Message to a Workstation ID(s) When you send a Break message to another workstation, it displays immediately at the workstation you specify. However, a user must be signed onto the workstation for the message to display. To send a Break message to another workstation: 1.

At a command line, type SNDBRKMSG

(SEND BREAK MESSAGE) and press F4.

Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) Type choices, press Enter. Message text . . . . . . . . . .

test message

To work station message queue . W1 Library . . . . . . . . . . . + for more values Message type . . . . . . . . . . Message queue to get reply . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name, "ALLWS *LIBL Name, *LIBL

*LIBL *INFO QSYSOPR *LIBL

*INFO, *INQ Name Name, *LIBL Bottom

===> F3=Exit

F4=Prompt

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


F24=More keys

2.

Type the Message.

3.

At the To work station message queue field, type the workstation ID of the workstation to receive the message, for example, W1, and press Enter. The break message is sent to the workstation you specify.

4.

Press F3 to exit.

August 2000

Messages

8-5

SEND MESSAGES

Send a Message to a User ID with a Reply Line To send a message to a specific User ID with a reply line so they can respond back to your message: 1.

At a command line, type SNDMSG

(SEND MESSAGE) and press F4.

Send Message (SNDMSG) Type choices, press Enter. Message text . . . . . . . . . . > Is 2:00 a good time to meet?____ ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ To user profile . . . . . . . .

FRIEND

Name, *SYSOPR, *ALLACT...

Additional Parameters To message queue . . . . . . . . > _________ Library . . . . . . . . . . . *LIBL + for more values _________ *LIBL Message type . . . . . . . . . . *INFO

Name, *SYSOPR Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *INFO, *INQ More. . .

===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


2.

Type the Message.

3.

At the To user profile field, type the user ID of the person to receive the message, and press F10, Additional Parameters.

4.

At the Message Type field, type *INQ and press Enter. The message is sent with a reply line for the receiver to type a response to your message.

!

8-6

To display the Additional Parameters press F10 at the Send Message screen. If reply is to be sent to another workstation other than the one you sent the message from, the Message Queue to get Reply field must be filled in with the workstation or User ID which the reply is to be sent to.


August 2000

SEND MESSAGES

Send a Message to a Workstation ID(s) with a Reply Line To send a Break message to another workstation with a reply line: 1.

At a command line, type SNDBRKMSG (SEND BREAK MESSAGE) and press F4. Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) Type choices, press Enter. Message text . . . . . . . . . .

__________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ To work station message queue _______ Name, "ALLWS Library ..................... *LIBL Name, *LIBL + for more values *LIBL *INQ Message type . . . . . . . . . . *INFO, *INQ Name Message queue to get reply . . . QSYSOPR Library . . . . . . . . . . . . *LIBL Name, *LIBL Bottom ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display

F10+Additional parameters F24=More keys

F12=Cancel

2.

Type the Message.

3.

At the To work station message queue field, type the workstation ID of the workstation to receive the message, for example, W1, and press F10, Additional Parameters.

4.

At the Message type field, type *INQ

5.

At the Message queue to get reply field, type the workstation ID to receive the message with the reply line. The break message is sent to the workstation you specify.

August 2000

Messages

8-7

SEND MESSAGES

Reply to Messages To reply to a message sent to your workstation: 1.

At a command line, type DSPMSG at any command line and press F4. Display Messages (DSPMSG) Type choices, press Enter. Message queue . . . . . . . . . *WRKUSR Library . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . *

Name, *WRKUSR, *SYSOPR... Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *, *PRINT

Bottom ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display


F12=Cancel

2.

At the Message queue field, type the name of the message queue to view, or leave the default value and press Enter. If you are displaying the message sent to the workstation you are working from, type DSPMSG and press Enter.

3.

The inquiry message displays (if the message was sent in break mode, this screen would interrupt the user and display immediately on their screen): Display Messages Queue. . . . . . : Library. . . . : Severity . . . . :

MSECOFR QOSRSYS 00

System. . . . . . : Program . . . . . : *DSPMSG Library . . . . : Delivery. . . . . : *Notify

S1024600

Type reply, press Enter. From . . . . . : EDS 07/16/91 10:41:34 Do you like to send messages on the computer? Reply.. . : _________________________________________________________

Bottom F3=Exit F13=Remove All

4.

8-8

F11=Remove a Message F16=Remove All Except Unanswered

F12=Cancel F24=More keys

Type your reply and press Enter. The computer will send the original message and your reply to the user who originally inquired. You can see who sent the message at the From prompt.


August 2000

Display Messages

Display Messages Display messages for a user ID(s) To display messages: 1.

At a command line, type DSPMSG and press F4. The Display Messages (DSPMSG) screen displays: Display Messages (DSPMSG) Type choices, press Enter. Message queue . . . . . . . . . *WRKUSR Library . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . *



2.


F12=Cancel

At the Message queue field, type the user ID and press Enter.

!

You could also type DSPMSG xxxx (xxxx=User ID that you are displaying) and press Enter.

August 2000

Messages

8-9

Display Messages

Display Messages for a Workstation ID(s) To display messages for a specific workstation ID: 1.

At a command line, type DSPMSG and press F4. The Display Messages (DSPMSG) screen displays: Display Messages (DSPMSG) Type choices, press Enter. Message queue . . . . . . . . . *WRKUSR Library . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . *



2.


F12=Cancel

At the Message queue field, type the workstation ID of the workstation you want to display the message, (or leave the default value) and press Enter.

!

8-10

If you are displaying the message sent to the workstation you are working from, type DSPMSG and press Enter.


August 2000

Display Messages

Display System Messages To display system messages: 1.

Press the Shift + SysReq keys at the same time, then press Enter. The System Request menu displays. System Request System:

S1015993

Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Display sign on for alternative job End previous request Display current job Display messages Send a message Display system operator messages Display work station user

10. Start system request at previous system 11. Transfer to previous system 13. 14.

Start system request at home system Transfer to home system

Selection __ F3=Exit F12=Cancel

2.

More...

Type 6, Display system operator messages, and press Enter.

!

You could also type DSPMSG QSYSOPR messages.

and press Enter to display system operator

The following is an example of a system operator message: Verify alignment on printer P1 (I C G N R) The letters following the messages are the valid options you can select to answer the message. The verify alignment message is always answered with an I (Ignore). After the message is answered, the printer will continue printing. The System Request menu can be bypassed by pressing the Shift + SysReq keys at the same time, then typing 6 on the dotted line at the bottom of the screen, and pressing Enter.

August 2000

Messages

8-11

Display Messages

Display System Operator Messages/Help for System Messages To display additional help for system messages: 1.

Begin at the Display Messages screen. At the command line, type DSPMSG QSYSOPR and press Enter. Display Messages

Place cursor here and press Help

Queue . . . . . : Library . . . : Severity . . . :

System: Program . . . . : Library . . : Delivery . . . :

QSYSOPR QSYS 60

S1021419 *DSPMSG *HOLD

Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load form type '*STD' device P5 writer P5. (G B I H R C) G Reply . . . : Verify alignment on printer P5. (I G N R E C) I Reply . . . : Bottom... F3=Exit F13=Remove all

2.

F11=Remove a message F16=Remove all except unanswered


Position the cursor to the left of the message, or on the message, and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard. Additional Message Information displays: Additional Message Information Message ID . . . . . . : Message type . . . . . : Date sent . . . . . . . :

CPA4002 Inquiry 03/20/00

Severity . . . . . . :

99

Time sent

17:20:51

. . . . . :

Message . . . . : Verify alignment on printer P5. (I G N R E C) Cause . . . . . : The forms may not be aligned correctly. The first line For the file is 6. Possible choices for replying to message ....................................: I -- To continue printing aligned forms starting with the next line of the File, type an I. G -- To continue printing aligned forms skipping to the next form and Printing the first line again, type a G. N -- To print the first line again on the next form and to verify the alignment, 1. Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two keys, or press Reset. More... Reply . . . : I Press Enter to continue. F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F21=Select assistance level

8-12

F12=Cancel


August 2000

Display Messages

Display Messages from the WRKWTR screen To display only the messages for a specific device, for example, P1: 1.

Begin at the Work with All Printers (WRKWTR) screen. Work with All Printers Type options, press Enter. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work With 7=Display Messages 8=Work with Output Queue Opt 7

Device P1 P2 P3

Sts Sep MSGW END STR *File

Form Type

File

User

6=Release

User Data

*All

Parameters for options 1,2,3,4,6 or command F3=Exit

2.

F11=View 2

F12=Cancel

F17=Top

Bottom

F18=Bottom

F24=More Keys

Type 7, Display Messages, at the Opt field, (the Sts must be MSGW).

!

To display all printers including TCP/IP printers, type WRKWTR chapter 5, Printers, for more information on TCP/IP printers.) To display only printer P1, type WRKWTR

P1*

and press Enter.

To display only printers that start with P, type WRKWTR

August 2000

Messages

*ALL and press Enter. (See

P*

and press Enter.

8-13

DELETE MESSAGES

DELETE MESSAGES Unwanted messages should be deleted on a regular basis. 1.

At a command line, type DSPMSG and press F4.

2.

At the Message queue field, type a user ID, or leave the default value.

3.

Press Enter. Display Messages Queue . . . . . : Library . . . : Severity . . . :

System: Program . . . . : Library . . : Delivery . . . :

PAS_3179_1 QSYS 00

S1021419 *DSPMSG *NOTIFY

Type reply (if required), press Enter. From . . . : CHUCK 03/22/00 16:00:00 Nightly backup is scheduled for 18:00 Please complete your work and sign off by that time. From . . . : CHUCK 03/22/00 18:01:00 Nightly backup is in progress From . . . : CHUCK 03/22/00 18:02:00 Please sign off immediately so the backup can finish successfully. QINTER will be ended in 5 minutes so the backup can continue uninterrupted. From . . . : CHUCK 03/22/00 19:55:07

Nightly backup is complete for all applications. Bottom... F3=Exit F13=Remove all

4.

5.

8-14

F11=Remove a message F16=Remove all except unanswered



To remove one message, place the cursor on the message to delete and press F11.

•

To remove all messages in the queue, press F13 (it

•

). To remove all messages in the queue except those needing a reply, press F16.

is recommended to always use

F16

After removing any messages, press F3 to exit the Display Messages screen.


August 2000

MESSAGES - EXERCISES

MESSAGES - EXERCISES 1.

A message can be sent to or displayed for any workstation or user ID. _____ True _____ False

2.

If additional information is needed for a message, move the cursor to the message and press: _____ A. F4 _____ B. Enter _____ C. Help or F1 from a PC keyboard

3.

Which key should be pressed to remove all messages except the unanswered from the message queue(s)? _____ A. F11 _____ B. F13 _____ C. F16

4.

How would you define the response to the message: "Verify alignment on device P1 (ICGNR)" ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________

5.

What is the name of the system message queue? How do you access the system message queue? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________

August 2000

Messages

8-15

MESSAGES - EXERCISES

Solutions to Messages - Exercise 1.

True. Use SNDMSG from user ID's and SNDBRKMSG for workstation ID's.

2. C.

The Help key (or F1) will provide more information in screens, messages and fields.

3. C.

F16.

4.

Reply I (Ignore) to allow the printer to continue printing at the next line in the spool file.

5.

The name of the message queue is QSYSOPR To access QSYSOPR: •

Press Shift + SysReq, then type 6 and press Enter.

Or •

8-16

At a command line, type DSPMSG QSYSOPR and press Enter.


August 2000

9

Monitoring System Activity Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................................1 PRINT JOBS ............................................................................................2 Work with Spool Files...............................................................................2 Work with Spool Files Screen Definitions.................................................3 Work with Output Queues ........................................................................6 Work with Output Queues Screen Definitions ..........................................7 Work with Writers (Twinax Attached Printers)..........................................8 Work with All Printers Screen Definitions (Twinax Attached Printer) .......9 Printer Messages (Twinax Attached Printers) .......................................12 Work With Writers (TCP/IP Printers)......................................................15 Work with All Writers Screen Definitions (TCP/IP Printers)....................15 Printer Messages (TCP/IP Printers) .......................................................17 Subsystems ............................................................................................20 Work Active Job .....................................................................................20 Work with System Console Subsystem..................................................21 Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions ......................................22 Work with Interactive Subsystem ...........................................................24 Work with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Screen Definitions ............25 Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions ......................................26 End a User's Job ....................................................................................28 Work with Batch Subsystem...................................................................30 Work with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Screen Definitions ............31 Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions ......................................32 BATCH JOBS ..........................................................................................34 Work with Batch Jobs.............................................................................34 Work with Submitted Jobs Screen Definitions........................................34 Work with Job Queues ...........................................................................36 Work with All Job Queues Screen Definition..........................................36 MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY - EXERCISE....................................38 August 2000

Backups

9-i

Table of Contents


9-ii


August 2000

OVERVIEW

Monitor System Activity OVERVIEW •

Print Jobs - Work with Spool Files - Work with Output Queues - Work with Writers

•

Subsystems - Work with System Console Subsystem - Work with Interactive Subsystem - Work with Batch Subsystem

•

Batch Jobs - Work with Batch Jobs - Work with Job Queues

August 2000

Monitor System Activity

9-1

Print Jobs

Print Jobs Work with Spool Files To view, change or remove any spool file you must have spool control authority (spool control authority is covered in Chapter 4, Security). At command line, type WRKSPLF

!

*ALL

and press Enter.

To display only the spool files submitted under your User ID, at a command line, type WRKSPLF and press Enter. Work with All Spooled Files

Type options, press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with Printing Status Opt

File QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT

User EDS EDS EDS EDS

Device or Queue P4 P4 P4 P6

6=Release

User Data

Parameters for option 1,2,3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel

7=Messages

Total Sts Pages WTR 1 RDY 1 HLD 1 MSGW 1

Cur Page 1 1

Copy 1 1 1 1

Bottom F22=Printers

F24=More keys

Using Command WRKSPLF *ALL • • •

9-2

Is the spool file held? (HLD would display in the Sts field) Is the spool file in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field) Is the spool file complete? (OPN would display in the Sts field if the spool file is still processing)


August 2000

Print Jobs

Work with Spool Files Screen Definitions Options: 1 = Send

Send a spool file over the network.

2 = Change

Change the number of copies, printer to be used, etc. If no change is allowed, the field will not display.

3 = Hold

Prevent the spool file from printing, but keeps it on computer system to be printed at a later time by releasing it.

4 = Delete

Remove the spool file from list of jobs to be printed. The only way to recover data from report is to rerun the job that created the listing.

5 = Display

The spool file (report) displays on the screen. This way, you could quickly locate the information you need rather than printing entire report. This option can be used to locate a spool file (report), or to review a spool file before deleting.

6 = Release

Allows a held spool file to print.

7 = Messages

Display any system messages related to a spool file. Use this option when MSGW displays in the STS column.

8 = Attributes

Displays spool file characteristics/parameters. This is display only.

9 = Work With Printing Status

Displays printing status of selected spool file.

August 2000


9-3

Print Jobs

Columns: Opt

Allows entry of above option number(s) to complete desired task.

File

Defines the data file name of the print file. For example, QSYSPRT is a listing created by pressing the [PRINT] key.

User

User ID of the person signed on to terminal that created this spool file, or the program that created this spool file (e.g. DLDATAQ or QSPLJOB).

Device or Queue

Holding area (queue) that listing is waiting in or printer the listing will print at.

User Data

Application program or job that created spool file.

STS

Defines status of spool file. Possible values are: WTR - under control of write RDY - ready to print, waiting on writer/printer HLD – held MSGW - requires a message to be answered before job can continue OPN - job is still processing.

Total Pages

Total number of pages to be printed in this spool file.

Cur Page

Defines the page the printer is currently printing.

Copy

Identifies the number of copies on the spool file to print. All copies will print before next spool file is printed. Be careful with this option. Using your printer as a copier will slow down the printing of reports.

9-4


August 2000

Print Jobs

Function Keys: F3 = Exit

Exits the user to the original screen.

F10 = View 3

Due to the excess information in spool files, there are three screens. Use this key to see the third area. Think of the screen as a trifold:

F11 = View 2

Due to the excess information in spool files, there are two screens. Use this key to see the second area. Think of the screen as a bifold.

F12 = Cancel

Returns the user to the previous screen.

F22 = Printers

Displays the Work with all Printers (WRKWTR) screen.

F24 = More Keys

Gives a second screen of more available Function keys. The most commonly used of those keys is F5 = Refresh. The F5 key will update the current screen's data.

August 2000


9-5

Print Jobs

Work with Output Queues At a command line, type

WRKOUTQ

and press Enter.

The Work with All Output Queues screen displays. Work with All Output Queues Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 9=Work with 14=Clear Opt

Queue QPRINT QPRINTS QPRINT2 QTIOUTQ PA PAS_4214_1 PB PT PZ P1 P10 P2

Command ===> F3=Exit

!

5=Work with

Library QGPL QGPL QGPL QTILIB QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS

Files 30 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 104

6=Release

8=Description

Writer

PA PB P1 P2

Status RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS More...

F4=Prompt

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

F24=More keys

The Status of the Output Queue for day-to-day operations should be RLS. Never use option 4, Delete on this screen – this will delete the Output Queue. To delete a single spool file, type 5, Work with, then type 4, Delete, to delete the spool file.

Using Command WRKOUTQ: •

9-6

Is OUTQ held?

(HLD would display in the Status field)


August 2000

Print Jobs

Work with Output Queues Screen Definitions Options: 2 = Change 3 = Hold

Allows user to change output queue description. Does not allow any spool files to proceed to writer and printer by using this option.

4 = Delete

This option will delete the specified output queue. Never use this option unless directed to by an EDS Customer Support Representative. Accesses list of spool files in this print/output queue. Allows print jobs to exit, print and takes them off “hold” status. Displays description of specified output queue. This option will display writers started to this output queue. Clears all spool files from specified output queue.

5 - Work with 6 = Release 8 = Description 9 = Work With 14 = Clear Columns: Opt Queue Library Files Writer

STATUS

Allows entry of above option number(s) to complete desired task. Lists all output queues on system (there will be a queue for each printer) Defines the database library that contains the output queue Identifies the number of files in the queue waiting to be printed Identifies writer used to remove print files from output queue. Will be same names as queue and printer. If blank, must start writer so that jobs will print, or there may be no printer assigned to output queue (not all output queues have printers assigned). Status of queue. Possible values RLS = Release or HLD = Hold Immediately after a change, *CHG displays.

Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F12 = Cancel F24 = More Keys

August 2000

Exits the user to the original screen. Displays screen of parameters to respond to for command just typed in or defined. Displays the screen with updated information. Returns the user to the previous screen. Gives a second screen of more available Function keys. The most commonly used of those keys is F5 = Refresh. The F5 key will update the current screen's data.


9-7

Print Jobs

Work with Writers (Twinax Attached Printers) For CAT5 attached printers see Work With Writers (TCP/IP Printers) section in this chapter, or chapter 5, Printers. At a command line, type

WRKWTR

and press Enter.

The Work with All Printers screen displays: Work with All Printers Type options, press Enter. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue Opt

Device

Sts

Sep

Form Type

File

C1 C2 C3 DM P1 P2 P3 P4

STR STR STR END MSGW END END END

*FILE *FILE *FILE

*ALL *ALL *ALL

QSYSPRT PI002RP

MSECOFR LUKE

APCHECK

*FILE

*ALL

PRINTER

LISA

GL105

Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ===> F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top

!

9-8

6=Release User

User Data

or command F18=Bottom

Bottom F24=More keys

You can display all printers that start with specific characters. For example, to display all printers that start with the letter “P” only, type WRKWTR P* and press Enter.


August 2000

Print Jobs

Work with All Printers Screen Definitions (Twinax Attached Printer) Options (Twinax Attached Printer): 1 = Start (STRPRTWTR) 2 = Change (CHGWTR) 3 = Hold (HLDWTR)

4 = End (ENDWTR)

5 = Work with 6 = Release (RLSWTR) 7 = Display messages (DSPMSG) 8 = Work with output queue

August 2000

Resumes or starts up writer. This causes the writer to attach to the output queue and deliver listings to the printer. Changes the physical attributes of the writer. (This option should NOT be used.) Does not allow writer to escort listings from queue to printer, stops in midstream. (HLDWTR) Spool file will stop printing as soon as the printer buffer clears. Type 4 in Opt field and press F4. At the How to End field, type *IMMED and press Enter. This (ENDWTR) terminates functioning of writer. To resume, start the writer by typing 1, Start (STRPRTWTR) at the Opt field. (Work with Printer Writer screen) Displays the printer information only if the printer is started. Releases writer which allows printing to resume from the first page. Displays any system messages related to the operation of this writer. This option should be used when there is a message status. (MSGW would display in Sts field.) Access the list of spool files in this printer/output queue. (WRKOUTQ)


9-9

Print Jobs

Columns (Twinax Attached Printer): Opt

Allows entry of Option number(s) to complete desired task.

Device

List of writers defined on system; will be the same as output queue and printer associated with each writer.

Sts

Status of writer. Possible values are: STR or *STR -Started END or *END – Ended Use option 1 to start HLD or *HLD – Held Use option 6 to release MSGW - Message Waiting - Use option 7 to see message(s) JOBQ – Job Queue – The writer is currently on the job queue. Subsystem QSPL needs to be started (STRSBS QSPL). *CHG – Changed The writer was changed using option 2, Change. This option should NOT be used. (This status will only display *CHG.) *RLS – Released The writer was released using option 6, Release. (This status will only display as *RLS.)

Sep

Defines the number of pages to print before a spool file to separate it from other spool files. If *FILE displays, each spooled file specifies its own number of separator pages.

Form Type

Identifies the type of form that should be loaded on the printer. A message will be issued for each form change.

File

Defines data file name of spool file currently in writer.

User

User ID of person who created the spool file, or if it was created by a job it will have the name that the job creates, usually DLDATAQ, which is used for all print jobs from subsystem PRINTSBS.

User Data

User-specified data information regarding file currently printing.

9-10


August 2000

Print Jobs

Function Keys (Twinax Attached Printer): F3 = Exit

Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started.

F11 = View 2

Use this key to see the View 1 displays. Think of the screen as a bifold. For the Work with All Printers screen, View 1 displays writer, queue, and library the device is attached to.

F12 = Cancel

Returns the user to the previous screen.

F17 = Top

Returns screen to top of list of writers (if more than one screen)

F18 = Bottom

Moves screen to bottom of list of writers (if more than one screen)

F24 = More Keys

Gives a second screen of more available Function keys. The most commonly used of those keys is F5 = Refresh. The F5 key will update the current screen's data.

August 2000


9-11

Print Jobs

Printer Messages (Twinax Attached Printers) Printer messages are stored/located in the QSYSOPR message queue. There are several ways to display messages for printers. 1.

To display only the messages for a specific device (printer ID): a.

At a command line, type WRKWTR and press Enter. The Work with All Printers screen displays. Work with All Printers Type options, press Enter. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue Opt

7

Device

Sts

Sep

Form Type

File

C1 C2 C3 DM P1 P2 P3 P4

STR STR STR END

*FILE *FILE *FILE

*ALL *ALL *ALL

QSYSPRT PI002RP

MSECOFR LUKE

APCHECK

PRINTER

LISA

GL105

MSGW

*FILE

*ALL

User

User Data

END END END

Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 ===> F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top

b.

6=Release

or command F18=Bottom

Bottom F24=More keys

At the Opt field, next to the Device ID (printer ID) with a MSGW Status, type 7, Display messages, and press Enter. Only messages for that device display.

2. To display ALL messages in the QSYSOPR message queue: •

At a command line, type DSPMSG

QSYSOPR

and press Enter.

Or •

9-12

Press Shift + SysReq, then type 6


August 2000

Print Jobs

Some of the common messages that could display when investigating a MSGW status on the WRKWTR screen are: Load form type 'HDCK' device P1 writer P1 (HCGIR) Reply ________________________________ H C G I R are listed as possible responses; they are defined as: H - hold the file C - cancel processing G - begins printing the current file I - ignore request to change form type R - search queue for same form currently being used and re-try In most cases you will change your form in the identified printer, type G to begin printing the current file and press Enter.

Verify alignment on device P1 (ICGNR) Reply ________________________________ I C G N R are listed as possible responses; they are defined as: I - continue printing on aligned forms C - cancel processing G - skip to next form, print first line and continue N - print first line on next form and allow alignment verification R - print first line on current form and allow alignment verification Normally, you would type I to continue printing on the aligned forms.

August 2000


9-13

Print Jobs

Examples of printer messages as they would display on the system:

A

Message ID . . . . . . : Message type . . . . . : Date sent . . . . . . :

dditional Message Information CPA3394 Severity . . . . . . . : Inquiry 04/18/00 Time sent . . . . . . :

99 16:51:13

Message . . . . : Load form type 'HDCK' device P1 writer p1. (H C G I R) Cause . . . . . : The file on output queue P1 in library QUSRSYS requires form type 'HDCK' to be loaded on device P1. The form type for the file was all blanks when '' appears as the form type. Recovery . . . : Do one of the following: -- Type H to hold the file and print the next file on the output queue. -- Type C to cancel the writer. -- Type G after the form type is loaded to begin printing the current file. -- Type I to ignore the request to change the form type and print the file on the currently loaded form type. More... Type reply below, then press Enter. Reply . . . .

G_________________________________________ Bottom

F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F21=Select assistance level


F12=Cancel

Additional Message Information CPA4002 Severity . . . . . . . : Inquiry 04/18/00 Time sent . . . . . . :

99 16:52:08

Message . . . . : Verify alignment on printer TZ. (I G N R E C) Cause . . . . . : The forms may not be aligned correctly. The first line for the file is 5. Recovery . . . : Do one of the following and try the request again. Possible choices for replying to message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : I -- To continue printing aligned forms starting with the next line of the file, type an I. G -- To continue printing aligned forms skipping to the next form and printing the first line again, type a G. N -- To print the first line again on the next form and to verify the alignment. 1. Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two keys, or press Reset. More... Reply I Press Enter to continue.. Bottom F3=Exit F6=Print F11=Display message details F21=Select assistance level

9-14

F12=Cancel


August 2000

Print Jobs

Work With Writers (TCP/IP Printers) At a command line, type WRKWTR *ALL and press Enter. The Work with All Writers screen displays. Work with All Writers Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with output queue Opt

Writer BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE JF

Type

5=Work with

Device RMT RMT RMT RMT PRT FV RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT

Queue BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE JF

6=Release

7=Display messages

Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS


Status STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR

Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL More...

F24=More keys

Work with All Writers Screen Definitions (TCP/IP Printers) Options (TCP/IP Printers): 2 = Change (CHGWTR)

Changes the physical attributes of the writer. (This option should

NOT be used.) 3 = Hold (HLDWTR)

4 = End (ENDWTR)

5 = Work with 6 = Release (RLSWTR) 7 = Display Messages

8 = Work with output queue

August 2000

Does not allow writer to escort listings from queue to printer, stops in midstream. (HLDWTR) Spool file will stop printing as soon as the printer buffer clears. Type 4 at the Opt field and press F4. At the How to End field type *IMMED and press Enter. This terminates functioning of writer. To resume, start the writer by typing STRRMTWTR xx [xx=printer ID] and press Enter. (Work with Remote Writer screen) Displays the printer information only if the printer is started. Releases writer which allows printing to resume from the first page. Displays any system messages related to the operation of (DSPMSG) this writer. This option should be used when MSGW displays in Status field. Access the list of spool files in this printer/output queue. (WRKOUTQ)


9-15

Print Jobs

Columns (TCP/IP Printers): Opt Writer Type

Device Queue Library Status

Form Type

Allows entry of option number(s) to complete desired task. List of writers defined on the system (this will be the same as output queue and printer associated with each writer). The type of writer this printer is. PRT or RMT are the types for ARG systems. PRT = printer writer twinax attached printer. RMT= remote printer writer TCP/IP The name of the device where the output is produced. The device ID will be displayed for twinax attached printers – type will be PRT. The name of the outpout queue where the field is located. The name of the library where the output queue is located. Status of writer. Possible values are: STR or *STR Started END or *END – Ended - Use command STRRMTWTR to start the printer. JOBQ -Job Queue The writer is currently on the job queue. Subsystem QSPL needs to be started, type STRSBS QSPL. HLD or *HLD Held - Use option 6 to release *CHG - Changed The writer was changed using option 2, Change. This option should NOT be used. This Status will only display *CHG. *RLS - Released The writer was released using option 6, Release. This Status will only display *RLS. Identifies the type of form to load on the printer. A message will be issued for each form change.

Function Keys (TCP/IP Printers): F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F12 = Cancel F22= Start printer writer F24 = More keys

9-16

Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started. Provides assistance when typing additional parameter values for an option or when using a command. Return to the previous screen. Prompts for the Start Printer Writer command (STRPRTWTR) Displays a second screen of more available Function keys. The most commonly used of those keys is F5 = Refresh; this updates the current screen's data.


August 2000

Print Jobs

Printer Messages (TCP/IP Printers) Printer messages are stored/located in the QSYSOPR message queue. There are several ways to display messages for printers. 1.

To display only the messages for a specific device (printer ID): a.

At a command line, type WRKWTR *ALL and press Enter. The Work with All Writers screen displays. Work with All Writers Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with output queue Opt


Type

5=Work with

Device RMT RMT RMT RMT PRT FV RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT


6=Release

7=Display messages


Status STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR


b.


F24=More keys

At the Opt field, next to the Device ID (printer ID) with a MSGW Status, type 7, Display messages, and press Enter. Only the messages for that specific device display.

2. To display ALL messages in the QSYSOPR message queue: •

At a command line, type DSPMSG

QSYSOPR

and press Enter.

Or •

Press Shift + SysReq, then type 6

August 2000


9-17

Print Jobs

Some of the common messages you may see when investigating a MSGW status on the WRKWTR *ALL screen are: Load form type 'HDCK' device P1 writer P1 (HCGIR) Reply ________________________________ H C G I R are listed as possible responses; they are defined as: H - hold the file C - cancel processing G - begins printing the current file I - ignore request to change form type R - search queue for same form currently being used and re-try In most cases you will change your form in the identified printer, type G to begin printing the current file and press Enter.

Verify alignment on device P1 (ICGNR) Reply ________________________________ I C G N R are listed as possible responses; they are defined as: I - continue printing on aligned forms C - cancel processing G - skip to next form, print first line and continue N - print first line on next form and allow alignment verification R - print first line on current form and allow alignment verification Normally, you would type I to continue printing on the aligned forms.

9-18


August 2000

Print Jobs

Examples of printer messages as they would display on the system:

A


dditional Message Information CPA3394 Severity . . . . . . . : Inquiry 04/18/00 Time sent . . . . . . :

99 16:51:13

Message . . . . : Load form type 'HDCK' device P1 writer p1. (H C G I R) Cause . . . . . : The file on output queue P1 in library QUSRSYS requires form type 'HDCK' to be loaded on device P1. The form type for the file was all blanks when '' appears as the form type. Recovery . . . : Do one of the following: -- Type H to hold the file and print the next file on the output queue. -- Type C to cancel the writer. -- Type G after the form type is loaded to begin printing the current file. -- Type I to ignore the request to change the form type and print the file on the currently loaded form type. More... Type reply below, then press Enter. Reply . . . .

G_________________________________________ Bottom

F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F21=Select assistance level


F12=Cancel

Additional Message Information CPA4002 Severity . . . . . . . : Inquiry 04/18/00 Time sent . . . . . . :

99 16:52:08

Message . . . . : Verify alignment on printer TZ. (I G N R E C) Cause . . . . . : The forms may not be aligned correctly. The first line for the file is 5. Recovery . . . : Do one of the following and try the request again. Possible choices for replying to message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : I -- To continue printing aligned forms starting with the next line of the file, type an I. G -- To continue printing aligned forms skipping to the next form and printing the first line again, type a G. N -- To print the first line again on the next form and to verify the alignment. 1. Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two keys, or press Reset. More... Reply I Press Enter to continue.. Bottom F3=Exit F6=Print F11=Display message details F21=Select assistance level

August 2000

F12=Cancel


9-19

Subsystems

Subsystems Work Active Job To display all the subsystems and jobs running on the AS/400: At a command line type WRKACTJOB and press Enter. Press the Shift + Page Down keys to display additional subsystems [Page Down key on the PC keyboard]. Work with Active Jobs CPU %:

.0

Elapsed time:

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt Subsystem/Job ___ DLCOMMSBS ___ POLLRAPID ___ EZFORMS ___ XPOINTMB ___ XPOINTMP ___ XPOINTMS ___ PRINTSBS ___ QBATCH ___ QCMN

9-20

5=Work with 6=Release 13=Disconnect ...

User QSYS QPGMR QSYS MSECOFR MSECOFR MSECOFR QSYS QSYS QSYS

More... Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh

S101213G 04/19/00 11:19:41 Active jobs: 112

00:00:00

Type SBS BCH SBS BCH BCH BCH SBS SBS SBS

CPU % .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0

F10=Restart statistics

7=Display message

Function PGM-CRPOLLCL PGM-XPMN3BCL PGM-XPMN3BCL PGM-XPMN3BCL

Status DEQW ICFW DEQW DEQW DEQW DEQW DEQW DEQW

F11=Display elapsed data

•

When you first enter this screen, the CPU % (percentage of central processing unit being used) in the upper left corner will display 0, press F5, Refresh, to show the percentage.

•

If you keep pressing F5, the average percentage, during the last few minutes, displays.

•

To display an accurate current percentage, press F10.

•

If jobs are currently running in a subsystem, they show as indentations under the Subsystem/Job name.

•

Place your cursor in the CPU % column and press F16 to display which job is using the most CPU.

•

Use caution when you’re troubleshooting a dealer whose CPU % is extremely high (over 80%). Just by being in WRKACTJOB you are contributing to the problem. If at all possible, use WRKSBSJOB to get to the subsystem that you want to work with.

•

To release resources used after using WRKACTOB command, the user must sign off the device.


August 2000

Subsystems

Work with System Console Subsystem To display all jobs currently processing or waiting to process in the system console subsystem (QCTL): 1.

At a command line: •

Type WRKSBSJOB and press F4

Or •

Type WRKSBSJOB QCTL and press Enter. The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen, shown in step 3, displays. Work

with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB)

Type choices, press Enter. Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCTL User whose jobs to display . . . . *ALL Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *


F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

Name, *ALL, *JOBQ, *OUTQ Name, *ALL *, *PRINT


2.

To work with Subsystem QCTL, type QCTL and press Enter.

3.

The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen displays. Work with Subsystem Jobs 04/15/00 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . .

:

81024601 17:56:06

QCTL

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release 7=Display message 8=Work with spooled files 13=Disconnect Opt

Job User Type -----Status----Function DLBACKUP SUZY BATCH ACTIVE DLY-23:30:00 QPFRCOL QPGMR AUTO ACTIVE PGM-QPMLWAIT QPFRMON QPGMR BATCH ACTIVE QSYSSCD QPGMR BATCH ACTIVE PGM-QEZSCNEP W1 SUZY INTER ACTIVE CMD-WRKSBSJOB Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data F12=Cancel

August 2000


9-21

Subsystems

Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions Options: 2 = Change 3 = Hold 4 = End

5 = Work with 6 = Release 7 = Display message 8 = Work with spooled files 13 = Disconnect

Allows changes to specific job parameters to be made. These changes may be limited based on the job. Stops processing of job but keeps information already defined. Terminates processing of job and loses all information created. This option should not be used unless directed to do so by an EDS Customer Support Representative. Accessed an additional screen that allows you to acquire specific information on a job. Used to resume processing of held jobs. Displays any system messages related to this job. Use when the status is MSGW. Identifies and displays any print jobs associated with this job. To sign off, but save your place to return to in a short period of time.

Columns: Opt

Column to type any option number that was previously defined.

Job

The job name of the job processing. It may be a workstation ID.

User

User profile under which job is started (e.g. USERID or QPGMR).

Type

Defines type of job running. Possible values include: Inter - interactive job Batch - batch job

Status

Status of job. Possible values are: Active - currently processing Held - stopped processing

Function

Identifies command (cmd) or program (pgm) currently running to process this job.

9-22


August 2000

Subsystems



F4 = Prompt

Displays additional answers (if available) if pressed when cursor is in field.

F5 = Refresh

Updates information on screen.

F9 = Retrieve

Displays the last command executed from command line, which allows it to be run again without re-typing.

F11 = Display Schedule Data

Displays the date and time a job is scheduled to run.

F12 = Cancel

Returns to the previous screen.

August 2000


9-23

Subsystems

Work with Interactive Subsystem 1.

At a command line: •

Type WRKSBSJOB and press F4

Or •

Type WRKSBSJOB QINTER and press Enter. The Work with Subsystem Job, shown in step 3, displays. Work


Type choices, press Enter. Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . QINTER User whose jobs to display . . . . *ALL Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *


F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel



2.

To work with the Subsystem QINTER, type QINTER and press Enter.

3.

The Work with Subsystems Jobs screen displays. Work with Subsystem Jobs 04/15/00 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . :

QINTER

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files


Opt

Job A2 A4

User Greg Pauline

A5

Greg

Type INTER INTER INTER INTER INTER INTER INTER

A6 Carol A8 Dale Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel

6=Release

-----Status----ACTIVE GROUP ACTIVE GROUP ACTIVE ACTIVE GROUP

81024601 17:56:06

7=Display message Function PGM-PS1001CL GRP-SV00 GRP-SV00 PGM-SA0007CL GRP-Sl00 Bottom

F9=Retrieve


This screen is commonly used to determine if a job can be terminated to obtain a dedicated system. At the Opt field for the selected job, type 5, Work with, and press Enter.

9-24


August 2000

Subsystems

Work with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Screen Definitions Subsystem

Defines names of subsystem to be viewed. Possible entries: Name - specific subsystem (for example, QCTL) *ALL *JOBQ *OUTQ

User Whose Jobs to Display

Allows you to define one user ID to show jobs for or use system default and see all user's jobs: Name - specific user ID (for example, MSECOFR) *ALL - all user ID's

Output

Defines how information requested should be presented. Possible entries: * - display on screen *PRINT - create and print a spool file



F4 = Prompt

Place the cursor at the field and press F4 to display a list of valid field entries from which to choose, (if available).

F5 = Refresh


F12 = Cancel

Displays the previous screen.

F13 = How to use this Display

Shows help for prompt and associated display areas.

F24 = More Keys

Displays additional defined function keys.

August 2000


9-25

Subsystems



Changes specific job parameters. These changes could be limited, based on the job. Stops the job from processing; all job information is retained. Terminates processing of job and loses all information created. This option should not be used unless directed by an EDS Customer Support Representative. Displays an additional screen that allows you to access specific information about a job. Resume processing of held jobs. Displays any system messages related to this job; use when the Status is MSGW. Identifies and displays any print jobs associated with this job. Sign off, but save your place to return to in a short period of time.

Columns: Opt Job User Type

Function

9-26

Column to type any option number listed on the screen. The job name of the job processing (it could also be a workstation ID). User profile (ID) that was signed on and started the job (for example, USERID or QPGMR). The type of job running: Inter - interactive job Batch - batch job Status Status of job: Active - currently processing Held - stopped processing Identifies the command (cmd) or program (pgm) currently running to process this job.


August 2000

Subsystems



F4 = Prompt


F5 = Refresh


F9 = Retrieve


F11 = Display schedule data


F12 = Cancel


August 2000


9-27

Subsystems

End a User's Job Two options from the Work with Job menu can be used to end a user’s job: • Option 14 - Display open files Work with Job System: Job:

W1

User:

SO3

Number:

S1020872

039743


Display job status attributes Display job definition attributes Display job run attributes, if active Work with spooled files

10. 11. 12. 13.

Display job log, if active or on job queue Display call stack, if active Work with locks, if active Display library list, if active

14.

Display open files, if active

15. 16.

Display file overrides, if active Display commitment control status, if active

Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve

More . . . F12=Cancel

Select option 14 to verify if any file type, other than DSP is shown; if so DO NOT end the job. You must wait for the job to finish. Ending a job with files other than DSP can cause the data files to be outof-sync. Press Shift + PageDown to display the second screen of menu options [Press PageDown from a PC keyboard].

9-28


August 2000

Subsystems

•

Option 41 - End job

Work with Job Job:

W1

User:

System: S1020872 Number: 039743

SO3

Select one of the following: 17.

Display communications status, if active

30.

All of the above

40.

Change job

41.

End job

42. 43.

Hold job Release job

Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve

Bottom F12=Cancel

After verifying file type is DSP, end the job by choosing option 41.

End Job (ENDJOB) Type choices, press Enter. Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . User . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number . . . . . . . . . . . .

W1________ S03_______ 205430

How to end . . . . . .*IMMED Delay time, if *CNTRLD . . . . . Delete spooled files . . . . . .

Maximum log entries Additional interactive jobs

30 *NO

.Ø . . *NONE


Name Name 000000-999999 *CNTRLD, *IMMED Seconds *NO, *YES Number, *SAME, *NOMAX *NONE, *GRPJOB, *ALL


Bottom F12=Cancel

Change parameter at the How to end field to *IMMED (immediately) so the job will end before the user starts anything more. Change the Maximum log entries field to Ø. The user's job is ended. A message is sent that the job was ended and who ended the job.

August 2000


9-29

Subsystems

Work with Batch Subsystem 1.

At a command line: • Type WRKSBSJOB and press F4 Or • Type WRKSBSJOB QBATCH and press Enter. The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen, shown in step 3, displays. Work


Type choices, press Enter. Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . QBATCH User whose jobs to display . . . . *ALL Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *


F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel



2.

To work with the Subsystem QBATCH, type QBATCH

3.

The Work with Subsystems Jobs screen displays.

and press Enter.

Work with Subsystem Jobs 04/15/00 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . :

81024601 17:56:06

QBATCH

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release 7=Display message 8=Work with spooled files 13=Disconnect Opt

Job PA0106CL

User S01

Type BATCH

-----Status----ACTIVE

Function PGM-PA1060CL

Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display Schedule Data

9-30


Bottom

August 2000

Subsystems

Work with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Screen Definitions Subsystem

Defines names of subsystem to be viewed. Possible entries: Name - specific subsystem, (for example QBATCH) *ALL *JOBQ *OUTQ

User Whose Jobs to Display

Allows you to define one user ID to show jobs for or use system default and see all user's jobs: Name - specific user ID, (for example, MSECOFR) *ALL - all user ID's

Output

Defines how information requested should be presented. Possible entries: * - display on screen *PRINT - create a spool file and print it



F4 = Prompt


F5 = Refresh


F12 = Cancel


F13 = How to use this display

Shows help for prompt and associated display areas.

F24 = More Keys

Shows additional defined function keys.

August 2000


9-31

Subsystems



Changes specific job parameters. These changes could be limited, based on the job. Stops the job from processing; all job information is retained. Terminates processing of job and loses all information created. This option should not be used unless directed by an EDS Customer Support Representative. Displays an additional screen that allows you to access specific information about a job. Resume processing of held jobs. Displays any system messages related to this job; use when the Status is MSGW. Identifies and displays any print jobs associated with this job. Sign off, but save your place to return to in a short period of time.


Function

9-32



August 2000

Subsystems



F4 = Prompt


F5 = Refresh


F9 = Retrieve




F12 = Cancel


August 2000


9-33

BATCH JOBS

BATCH JOBS Work with Batch Jobs This is an alternative (to the previous command) to display jobs in the batch subsystem. At a command line, type WRKSBMJOB and press Enter.

Work with Submitted Jobs System: Submitted from . . . . . . . . :

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 8=Work with spooled files Opt

Job PA0106CL PA0106CL PA1380CL PA1400CL QSYSSCD QTGTELNETS QTFTP04559 QTLPD06818

User MSECOFR MSECOFR MSECOFR MSECOFR QPGMR QTCP QTCP QTCP

Type BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH

Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel

S1024762

*USER 6=Release

7=Display message

-----Status----OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ

Function

Bottom F9=Retrieve


Work with Submitted Jobs Screen Definitions Options: 2 = Change

8 = Work with spooled files

Changes specific job parameters. These changes could be limited, based on the job. Stops the job from processing; all job information is retained. Terminates processing of job and loses all information created. This option should not be used unless directed by an EDS Customer Support Representative. Displays an additional screen that allows you to access specific information about a job. Resume processing of held jobs. Displays any system messages related to this job; use when the Status is MSGW. Identifies and displays any print jobs associated with this job.

9-34


3 = Hold 4 = End

5 = Work with 6 = Release 7 = Display message

August 2000

BATCH JOBS


Function




F4 = Prompt


F5 = Refresh


F9 = Retrieve




F12 = Cancel


August 2000


9-35

BATCH JOBS

Work with Job Queues To display all job queues defined on your system and their status: At a command line, type WRKJOBQ and press Enter. Work with All Job Queues Type options, press Enter. 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Work with 8=Work with job schedule entries

Opt

Queue PCSJOBQ PSJOBQ QBASE QBATCH QCMN QFNC QINTER QPGMR QSNADS QSPL QS36EVOKE QS36MRT

Command ===> F3=Exit

Library

6=Release 14=Clear

Jobs

CSLIBR PSLIBR QGPL QGPL QGPL QGPL QGPL QSYS QGPL QGPL QGPL QGPL

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Subsystem

Status

DLCOMMSBS PRINTSBS


QBATCH QINTER QPGMR OSNADS QSPL QBATCH QINTER

More . . . F4=Prompt

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

F24=More keys

Work with All Job Queues Screen Definition Options: 3 = Hold 4 = Delete 5 = Work with 6 = Release 8 = Work with job schedule entries 14 = Clear

9-36

Places the job queue on hold. Delete the job queue. Access additional screen to display all jobs in selected queue. Resume processing of held jobs. View job schedule entries for a selected job queue. Clear all jobs from the specified job queues.


August 2000

BATCH JOBS

Columns: Opt Queue Library Jobs Subsystem Status

Allows entry of above option number(s) to complete desired task. All job holding areas in your computer. Defines the database library that contains the output queue Number of jobs in holding area waiting for processing. Area defined to process job. If blank, no jobs in this queue will be processed. Current standing of queue: RLS - released, able to process HLD - held, the queue is held



F4 = Prompt


F5 = Refresh


F12 = Cancel


F24 = More Keys

Displays additional Function keys.

August 2000


9-37

MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY - EXERCISE

MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY - EXERCISE Part One - Print jobs 1.

Which of the following commands will display all the spool files on your _____ _____ _____ _____

2.

WRKSPLF *ALL WRKOUTQ P1 WRKOUTQ WRKWTR P1

A. B. C. D.

WRKSPLF WRKOUTQ WRKWTR WRKWTR *ALL

Identify the following items which can be changed regarding a spool file: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

9-38

A. B. C. D.

Which of the following commands will display all of the writers? _____ _____ _____ _____

4.

WRKSPLF and press F4. WRKSPLF *ALL and press Enter. WRKOUTQ and press F4. WRKWTR and press Enter.

Which of the following commands will display only the spool files within the output queue for printer P1? _____ _____ _____ _____

3.

A. B. C. D.

system?

A. B. C. D. E. F.

Print device Number of copies Form type Priority Output queue All of the above


August 2000


5.

You should check the writers to see if they are actively printing before doing an IPL, backup or power down. True False If true, what should you do?

6.

What is the command to execute the following? A. B. C. D. E. F.

7.

Work with Job Queues Work with Output Queues Work with Spool Files Work with Interactive Subsystem Work with Batch Subsystem Work with Writers

For day-to-day operations, what should be the status of any output queue? _____ A. _____ B.

8.

HLD RLS

For day-to-day operations, what should be the status of any of the writers? _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

9.

______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________

STR END MSGW

If the top of the form is set properly for P1, what is the most appropriate response to the printer message: "VERIFY ALIGNMENT ON DEVICE P1 (ICGNR)" _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

August 2000

I C G N R


9-39


10.

If the following message displays: "LOAD FORM TYPE 'HDCK' DEVICE P1 WRITER P1 (HCGIR)" Place the following items in order of execution. (NOTE: Not all are to be used) _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

11.

A. B. C. D. E. F.

view message in qsysopr hit printer answer G to print 1 line yell at printer load forms press Enter

What is the command to view spool files on the AS/400 for User Betty? _______________________________________

12.

List the steps to hold a spool file that is to be printed on P2. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

13.

List the steps to delete a spool file that is on printer P4 and the Sts is HLD. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

14.

List the steps to display a spool file on printer P5. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

9-40


August 2000


15.

List the steps to change a spool file on printer P3. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

16.

How do you know if a writer is attached to the output queue? ____________________ ____________________

17.

How do you attach a writer to the output queue? ____________________ ____________________

18.

What is the command to display all writers that start with C? ____________________ ____________________

August 2000


9-41


Part Two - Subsystems 1.

What subsystem does an interactive job process in? ____________________

2.

Which command allows you to work with interactive jobs? _____ A. _____ B.

3.

WRKSBSJOB QINTER WRKSBSJOB QBATCH

List the steps to end an interactive job. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

4.

You can end any job no matter what type of files the job is using. _____ True _____ False

5.

Dealer complains that the system is running really slow. What command could you use to see if there is a job using a large percentage of the CPU? _______________________________

9-42


August 2000


Part Three - Batch Jobs 1.

List the steps to display all the job queues. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________

2.

What command do you use to determine the status of a job queue? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________

3.

For day-to-day operations, what should be the status of all the job queues? _____ A _____ B.

August 2000

HLD RLS


9-43


Solutions to Monitoring System Activity - Exercise Part One - Print Jobs 1.

B. You could also see all spool files using option A if you define *ALL as the user and then press Enter.

2.

B. WRKOUTQ would show all output queues but by adding the parameter P1, only the information for that printer will show.

3.

C (WRKWTR) for twinax attached printers, D (WRKWTR *ALL) for TCP/IP printers.

4.

F.

5.

True. Wait until they have completed their printing or you will loose data.

6.

a. b. c. d. e. f.

WRKJOBQ WRKOUTQ WRKSPLF WRKSBSJOB QINTER WRKSBSJOB QBATCH WRKWTR

7.

B.

8.

A.

9.

I - The rest of the file will print without skipping and without repeating.

10.

A-1 B - not used C-3 D - not used E-2 F-4

9-44


August 2000


11.

WRKSPLF

12.

Type WRKOUTQ P2 Press Enter. Type 3 in front of file to be held. Press Enter..

13.

Type WRKOUTQ P4 Press Enter. Type 4 in front of file to delete. Press Enter. Press Enter again to confirm.

14.

Type WRKOUTQ P5 Press Enter. Type 5 in front of file to display. Press Enter.

15.

Type WRKOUTQ P3 Press Enter. Type 2 in front of spool file to change. Press Enter. Make changes. Press Enter. Note:

Betty

Status cannot be WTR for spool file if spool file is to be changed.

16.

The name of the writer displays in the writer column of the Work with All Output Queue screen.

17.

Type WRKWTR. Press Enter. Type 1 in front of writer to start. Press Enter. When started, writer will attach to output queue.

18.

Type WRKWTR C*

August 2000


9-45


Part Two - Subsystems 1.

QINTER

2.

A.

3.

Type WRKSBSJOB QINTER Press Enter. Type 5 in front of job to end. Press Enter. Type 14. Press Enter. Verify there are only DSP files. Press Enter. Type 41 to end. Press Enter. Change how to end parameter to *IMMED. Change maximum log entries to Ø. Press Enter.

4.

False. Only end jobs with file type DSP.

5.

WRKACTJOB then F16 on the CPU% field

Part Three - Batch Jobs 1.

Type WRKJOBQ Press Enter.

2.

WRKJOBQ

3.

B.

9-46


August 2000

10

Security Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 1 System Security........................................................................... 2 Physical ....................................................................................... 2 Software ...................................................................................... 3 IBM SECURITY............................................................................. 4 IBM User Classes/Special Authority ............................................ 4 Initial Profiles ............................................................................... 5 Several Initial Menus and Libraries .............................................. 5 Commands to Manipulate IBM User Profiles ............................... 5 IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS ..................... 6 Create/Copy/Change/Delete DEALERLINE XL User Profiles ...... 6 Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Screen Definitions ............. 11 Set Initial Menu / Library After Sign On...................................... 14 Change a user profile ................................................................ 15 Change Password ..................................................................... 16 Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments ................................ 17 Workstation Printer Assignments............................................... 19 IBM SECURITY SCREENS......................................................... 20 Create a User Profile ................................................................. 20 Create User Profile Screen Definitions ...................................... 22 Change a User Profile ............................................................... 24 Change User Profile Screen Definitions..................................... 26 Delete a User Profile.................................................................. 28 SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 1 ............................................... 30 SOLUTIONS TO SECURITY - EXERCISE................................. 32 SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 ............................................... 33

August 2000

Security

10-i

Table of Contents


10-ii


August 2000

OVERVIEW

Security

OVERVIEW •

System Security - Physical - Software

•

IBM Security - IBM User Classes/Special Authority - Initial Profiles - Several Initial Menus and Libraries - Commands to Manipulate IBM User Profiles

•

DEALERLINE XL Security - Enter/Update/Delete DEALERLINE XL Profiles - Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments - IBM Security Screens

August 2000

Security

10-1

System Security

System Security Security controls who is allowed to see and use the information on the system. If a user calls and requests you add some sort of security to his/her profile, or another user’s profile, you want to make sure you’re speaking with the system administrator. If you are not sure you’re speaking with an authorized person, the best thing to do would be to walk the individual through the procedure to make the change. If this individual doesn’t have authority to make changes to user profiles, he/she will receive an error message. This is your clue that the person you’re speaking with is probably not an authorized person. You can very politely explain the system administrator must make changes to a user profile. At no time should you just go ahead and change someone’s security without being certain the person you’re speaking with is the System Administrator!

Physical There are several types of physical security to consider when installing a computer system. These issues include: System

The CPU should be located in a secured area where only authorized personnel may access it.

Workstation

Where are these located? Are they signed off when not in use?

Printer

Again, these need to be secured so that not only hardware is safe but also the documents being printed.

Forms

All sensitive documents need to be secure; you do not want just anyone to walk away with a check or statement.

Keys

Copies of all keys to the CPU and monitors should be maintained in a locked area. The original key should remain in the keylock.

Backup Tape Storage

THIS IS CRITICAL. The storage of your backup tapes could mean the difference between being able to restore your data or not. Backup tapes should be stored off-site or in a fireproof safe on-site. System Save tapes should be stored in two different locations. The current system save tape(s) could be stored on-site; the prior system save tapes(s) could be stored off-site. One of the DEALERLINE nightly backup tapes should be kept off-site also.

In general, security (physical or software) determines who has access to what.

10-2


August 2000

System Security

Software There are two types of software defined security: •

IBM security is defined in the operating system. It determines who can sign on to the AS/400 and what commands they can execute.

•

DEALERLINE XL application defined security identifies what tasks in which areas of which applications a user may work. It can also limit access to each company and to DEALERLINE XL security profiles.

August 2000

Security

10-3

IBM SECURITY

IBM SECURITY IBM User Classes/Special Authority Default Authorities for User Classes USER CLASS

*ALLOBJ

*SECADM

*SAVSYS

*JOBCTL

SECOFR

X

X

X

X

SECADM

X

X

X

X

PGMR

X

X

X

SYSOPR

X

X

X

USER

X

X

*SERVICE

*SPLCTL

*IOSYSCFG

X

X

X

*ALLOBJ -

Allows the user access to all programs and files (needed for daily backup).

*SECADM -

Security functions to add/delete/change user profiles (needed to apply EOD updates)

*SAVSYS -

Allows the user to save, restore, and free storage space for all programs and files.

*JOBCTL -

Allows the user to change, display, hold, release, cancel, and clear all jobs, start writers, stop and start active subsystems (needed for daily backup with power down).

*SERVICE -

Allows the use of on-line diagnostic tools to fix system problems.

*SPLCTL -

Allows the user to perform all spool functions. *SPLCTL also allows the user to start and end writers (needed for daily backup).

*IOSYSCFG -

Allows the user the ability to work with I/O system configuration (needed to apply EOD updates)

10-4


August 2000

IBM SECURITY

Initial Profiles During the DEALERLINE load, the following initial profiles are set up:

NAME

LIMIT CAPABILITIES LIBRARY/MENU

DESCRIPTION

MSECOFR SAUSER BLUSER1 PRUSER1 SMUSER1 PRMNGR SLUSER1

Master Security System Operator BUSINESSLINE XL Manager PARTSLINE XL Default User SERVICELINE XL Default User PARTSLINE XL Manager SALESLINE XL User

*NO *NO *PARTIAL *YES *YES *YES *YES

INITIAL

SALIBR/DMM000 SALIBR/DMM000 BLLIBR/GLM00 PRLIBR/PRM00 SVLIBR/SVMAIN PRLIBR/PRMU1 SLLIBR/SLMAIN

Several Initial Menus and Libraries MENU LIBRARY

DESCRIPTION

DMM000 DMM001 APM00 ARM00 GLM00 PAM00 PRM00 PRLIBR SVMAIN SLMAIN

SALIBR BLLIBR BLLIBR BLLIBR BLLIBR PALIBR SVLIBR SLLIBR

DEALERLINE XL Main Menu BUSINESSLINE Main Menu Accounts Payable Menu Accounts Receivable Menu General Ledger Menu Payroll Menu PARTSLINE XL Main Menu SERVICELINE XL Main Menu SALESLINE XL Main Menu

Commands to Manipulate IBM User Profiles CRTUSRPRF

Create user profile

DSPUSRPRF

Display user profile

DLTUSRPRF

Delete user profile

WRKUSRPRF

Work with user profile

CHGUSRPRF

Change user profile

RSTUSRPRF

Restore user profile

CHGPWD

Change user password

August 2000

Security

10-5

IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS

IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Create/Copy/Change/Delete DEALERLINE XL User Profiles To create a DEALERLINE user profile from DEALERLINE: 1.

At a command line, type GO DMM000 and press Enter. Or Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays. DEALERLINE XL Main Menu DMM000 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SDS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE

6. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION 7. 8. 9. 23. 90.

SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RAPID DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off

Electronic Data Systems Copyright (C) 1994 All rights reserved. Selection or command: ==> F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F9=RETRIEVE F12=CANCEL F13=INFORMATION ASSISTANT F16=AS/400 MAIN MENU

2.

Type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. The System Administration Main Menu displays. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu DMM005 Select one of the following: 1. 2.

3. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 11.

Backups Communications

Security Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work - Station Printer Assignments Name and Address Menu

13.

Reset Remote Dial Connection 23. 24. Selection or command: ==> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 Main Menu

3.

DEALERLINE Main Menu Sign Off

Type 3, Security, and press Enter.

10-6


August 2000


The Work with User Security screen displays. SA1025S1 J3

DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Work with User Security

3/8/93 9:50:45

Type Option Then Press Enter 1 = Add

3=Copy

4=Delete

5=Display

7=Dir Entry

8=User Profiles

User ID

User Name

Default Company Number-Name

3

BLUSER1 PRUSER1 PRMNGR SAUSER1 SMUSER1

BUSINESSLINE Manager PARTSLINE Default User PARTSLINE Manager System Operator SERVICELINE User

01 01 01 01 01

F3=Exit

4.

2=Change

Opt

DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE

OF OF OF OF OF

SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD

Roll Up/Down

At the Opt field, next to the User ID to access, type the option number and press Enter. In this example, type 3 to copy an existing user profile and press Enter.

5.

The Copy To Prompt window displays: SA1025S1 J3


3/8/93 9:50:45


2=Change

3=Copy

4=Delete

Copy To 7=Dir PromptEntry 5=Display

User ID

User Name

3

BLUSER1 PRUSER1 PRMNGR SAUSER1 SMUSER1

Copy To New User ID. . BUSINESSLINE Manager 01 PARTSLINE Default User 01 F12=Cancel PARTSLINE Manager 01 System Operator 01 SERVICELINE User 01

F3=Exit

8=User Profiles

Selected User ID . Default . . BLUSER1 Company Number-Name

Opt

________ DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE

OF OF OF OF OF


Roll Up/Down

At the Copy To New User ID field, type the user ID to add and press Enter.

August 2000

Security

10-7


6.

The Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) screen displays. CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES, PRESS ENTER.

•

USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION'

JOY NAME *USRPRF NAME, *USRPRF, *NONE *NO *NO, *YES *ENABLED *ENABLED, *DISABLED *USER *USER, *SYSOPR, *PGMR... *SYSVAL *SYSVAL, *BASIC, *INTERMED... DBLIBR NAME, *CRTDFT SA0030CL NAME, *NONE SALIBR NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB DMM000 NAME, *SIGNOFF *LIBL NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NO *NO, *PARTIAL, *YES SERVICE CASHIER

F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F5=REFRESH F13=HOW TO USE THIS DISPLAY

F10=ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS F24=MORE KEYS

F12=CANCEL

If

the user ID being added is to have the same security as the user ID that was copied, change the USER PASSWORD and change the TEXT DESCRIPTION field for a new profile. Press Enter.

The IBM User ID is added. The DEALERLINE application security screen displays. •

If the user ID being added has to have the security changed or verified, type the USER PASSWORD and TEXT DESCRIPTION field for a new profile, and press F10. CReate User Profile

(CRTUSRPRF)

Type choices, press Enter. Additional Parameters Special authority > + for more values Special environment > Display sign-on information > Password expiration interval > Limit device sessions > Keyboard buffering > Maximum allowed storage > Highest schedule priority > Job description > Library > Group profile > Owner >

ALLOBJ

*USRCLS,*NONE,

*SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NOMAX ‘1’ DLJOBD SALIBR *NONE *USRPRF

*SYSVAL, *NONE, *S36 *SYSVAL, *NO, *YES 1-366, *SYSVAL, *NOMAX *SYSVAL, *YES, *NO... *SYSVAL, *NO, *TYPEAHEAD KILOBYTES, *NOMAX 0-9 NAME NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB NAME, *NONE *USRPRF,*GRPPRF

*ALLOBJ

MORE... F3=ExitT F4=Prpomt F24=More keys

7.

F5=Refresh F12=Cancel


Verify the Special authority (authorities) is correct for the profile you are creating. (See page 4 for Special Authority definitions.) If you need to add Special authorities, type + (plus sign) at the field, press Field Exit, or the Space bar, then Enter. This will NOT erase the original value at the Special authority field; it will display on the next screen). After you’ve added all the Special authority (authorities) necessary, press the Shift and ArrowUp key.

10-8


August 2000


8.

Additional parameters display.

If this user needs to have print screens print at a specific printer, other than the system printer, the default values for the Print device and Output queue need to be changed. See steps 8a and 8b. Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices, press Enter. Group authority > *NONE *NONE, *ALL, * CHANGE, *USE... Group authority type.............> *PRIVATE *PRIVATE, *PGP Supplemental groups..............> *NONE Name, *NONE + for more values Accounting code > *BLANK Document Password................> *NONE Name, *NONE Message queue > *USRPRF Name, *USRPRF Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Delivery > NOTIFY *NOTIFY, *BREAK, *HOLD, *DFT Severity code filter > 0 0-99

Print device Output queue

> P2 > *DEV

Name, *WRKSTN, *DEV

Library Attention program

> *SYSVAL

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, *NONE, *SYSVAL, *ASSIST

Name, *WRKSTN, *SYSVAL

BOTTOM F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys

a.

b. 9.

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


At the Print device field, type the Printer ID of the printer that print screens are to print at. At the Output queue field, type *DEV

!

Do not type the Printer ID of the system printer!

Press Enter.

The IBM User ID is added. The DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY screen displays: SA1025S2 J3


User ID SMITH Security Officer (Y/N) N Assigned Default Company 1 Application Name BUSINESSLINE

DCS/400

5/08/00 9:55:56

User Name EDWARD D. SMITH, GENERAL MANAGER Allowed Into All Companies (Y/N) N Job Classification Security Level 1 Reports

Maintenance

Entry

Inquiry

- Accounts Payable

X

X

X

X

- Accounts Receivable

X

X

X

X

- Fixed Assets

X

X

X

X

- General Ledger

X

X

X

X

- Communications

X

X

X

X

- Answerbacks

X

X

X

X

- Setup & Installation

X

X

X

X +

F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

Roll Up/Down

a. Verify the User ID and User Name are correct (if not make revisions now). b. The Security Officer (Y/N) field defines access to the security setup. Type Y for the system administrator and their backup; for all other users, type N c. For multiple company stores, at Allowed into All Companies (Y/N), type N to restrict a user to one company. Type Y to allow access to all companies. d. The Assigned Default Company identifies the primary company used. For multiple company users, the user can change this when accessing each option. e. The Job Classification Security Level limits screen access within different applications. f.

Locate the Application Name and allow the user access by typing X in the correct column. To deny access, leave it blank, or press Shift + ArowUp keys to advance to the next screen.

August 2000

Security

10-9


SA1025S2 J3


User ID SMITH Security Officer (Y/N) N Assigned Default Company 1

5/08/00 9:55:56

User Name EDWARD D. SMITH, GENERAL MANAGER Allowed Into All Companies (Y/N) N Job Classification Security Level 1

Application Name

Reports

Maintenance

Entry

Inquiry

- Transactions

X

X

X

X

PARTSLINE

- Payroll Accounting Payroll Type - AS/400 Parts

X X X

X X X

X X X

X X X

RAPID/400

- Communications

X

X

X

X

- Answerbacks

X

X

X

X

PAYROLL


X

X

X

X

- Transactions

X

X

X

X +

F3=Exit

g.

F12=Cancel

Roll Up/Down

Locate the Application Name and allow the user access by typing X in the correct column. To deny access, leave it blank, or press Shift + ArowUp keys to advance to the next screen. SA1025S2 J3



5/08/00 9:55:56


Reports

Maintenance

Entry

Inquiry

REPORTLINE

- Reportline

Application Name

X

X

X

X

SALESLINE/400

- Credit Bureau

X

X

X

X

- Finance & Insurance

X

X

X

X

- Vehicle Inventory

X

X

X

X

- GMAC MAPS

X

X

X

X

- Prospecting

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


X

+ F3=Exit

h.

F12=Cancel

Roll Up/Down

Locate the Application Name and allow the user access by typing X in the correct column. To deny access, leave it blank, or press Shift + ArowUp keys to advance to the next screen. SA1025S2 J3




Application Name SERVICELINE XL

F3=Exit

- SERVICELINE XL

F12=Cancel

5/08/00 9:55:56

Reports X

Maintenance X

Entry

Inquiry

X

Roll Up/Down

10. Press Enter to save the new user profile.

10-10


August 2000


Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Screen Definitions CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES, PRESS ENTER. USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL

BURT *USRPRF *NO *ENABLED *USER *SYSVAL

CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY

DBLIBR SA0030CL SALIBR DMM000 *SALIBR

NAME NAME, *USRPRF, *NONE *NO, *YES *ENABLED, *DISABLED *USER, *SYSOPR, *PGMR... *SYSVAL, *BASIC, *INTERMED... NAME, *CRTDFT NAME, *NONE NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB NAME, *SIGNOFF

LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION'

NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NO *NO, *PARTIAL, *YES GENERAL MANAGER



User Profile User Password Set Password to Expire

Status

User Class Assistance Level

Current Library Initial Program to Call

Library Initial Menu/Library

F12=CANCEL

User ID name can only be modified using the Change (CHGUSRPRF) procedure. Type the user password. If *USRPRF value is left here, the system uses your User Profile entry as the password. *YES forces the user to change their password every so many days. The number of days is defined in system values. Leaving the *NO default will allow password changes, but not force them. The status of the user profile should be *Enabled. A Disabled user cannot sign on. If the user receives message: User XXX cannot sign on, check if the status is Disabled. Use one of the IBM user classes defined on page 4, based on user needs. Defines to the system the level of help or assistance needed. Choices are basic, intermediate or advanced. Leaving the *SYSVAL default will use the system defined value. Defines library user will function in. This value should be DBLIBR. Based on where the user is accessing from. There are four choices: For all ID's use SA0030CL, except for SALESLINE XL users - SLMAINCL, and for SERVICELINE XL users – SVMAINCL. Library to find initial program. SA0030CL is in SALIBR, SLMAINCL is found in SLLIBR and SVMAINCL is found in SVLIBR. First menu the user will see and the library it is located in. Base this entry on specific user needs. If the user receives message: Job ending immediately. Display job log for more information, it is likely the library attached to the initial menu is wrong. DMM000 is most commonly used for Initial Menu.

Limit Capabilities

*YES will restrict user's use of the command line. *NO will not limit them, but their command knowledge may.

Text Description

Free form definition area to describe user, job title, location or whatever text the system administrator requires.

August 2000

Security

10-11


After completing this screen, press F10, Additional Parameters, then press Shift + ArrowUp keys to display the next screen. CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS TYPE CHOICES, PRESS ENTER. Special authority > + for more values Special environment > Display sign-on information > Password expiration interval > Limit device sessions > Keyboard buffering > Maximum allowed storage > Highest schedule priority > Job description > Library > Group profile > Owner > F3=ExitT F4=Prpomt F24=More keys

*USRCLS *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NOMAX 3 DLJOBD SALIBR *NONE *USRPRF


*USRCLS,*NONE,

*ALLOBJ

*SYSVAL, *NONE, *S36 *SYSVAL, *NO, *YES 1-366, *SYSVAL, *NOMAX *SYSVAL, *YES, *NO... *SYSVAL, *NO, *TYPEAHEAD KILOBYTES, *NOMAX 0-9 NAME NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB NAME, *NONE *USRPRF,*GRPPRF MORE... F13=How to use this display

Use the default values on this screen except: Special Authority Job Description

Library

Type the values required, based on the authority the user requires. The value for this should be DLJOBD which is an acronym for: DEALERLINE JOB DESCRIPTION. •

If the user is a SALESLINE XL user, the value should be SLJOBD which is an acronym for: SALESLINE JOB DESCRIPTION.

•

If the user is a SERVICELINE XL user the value should be SVJOBD which is an acronym for SERVICELINE ADVISOR JOB DESCRIPTION.

Library location of DEALERLINE job descriptions. The value should read SALIBR. For a SALESLINE XL user the value should read SLLIBR and for a SERVICELINE XL user, the value should be SVLIBR.

After completing this screen, press Shift + Arrow Up keys to display the next screen.

10-12


August 2000


Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices, press Enter. Group authority > Group authority type.............> Supplemental groups..............> + for more values Accounting code > Document Password................> Message queue > Library Delivery > Severity code filter > Print device > Output queue > Library Attention program >

*NONE *PRIVATE *NONE


F12=Cancel

F5=Refresh

*BLANK *NONE *USRPRF

*NONE, *ALL, * CHANGE, *USE... *PRIVATE, *PGP Name, *NONE Name, *NONE Name, *USRPRF Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NOTIFY, *BREAK, *HOLD, *DFT 0-99 Name, *WRKSTN, *SYSVAL Name, *WRKSTN, *DEV Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, *NONE, *SYSVAL, *ASSIST

NOTIFY 0 P2 *DEV *SYSVAL


Use the default values on this screen except: Print Device

Defines printer output location for this user.

Output Queue

Should read *DEV if a printer device has been defined, and *WRKSTN if no printer device is defined.

After completing this screen, press Shift + Arrow Up keys to display the next screen. Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices, press Enter. Sort Sequence > Library........................> Language ID......................> Country ID ......................> Coded character set ID...........> Locale job attributes............> + for more values Locale...........................>

*SYSVAL

Name, *SYSVAL, *HEX. Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *SYSVAL... *SYSVAL... *SYSVAL, *HEX... *SYSVAL, *HEX, *CCSID...

User options ....................> + for more values User ID number ..................> Group ID number .................> Home Directory...................>

*NONE

*NONE, *CLKWD, *EXPERT...

*GEN *NONE *USRPRF

1-4294967294, *GEN 1-4294967294, *NONE, *GEN

*SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL

Authority........................> *EXCLUDE

*ALL, *CHANGE, *USE< *EXCLUDE Bott


F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


Use the default values for this screen – press Enter to save information. The user profile is created.

August 2000

Security

10-13


Set Initial Menu / Library After Sign On Customer’s that work in one particular application SALESLINE, BUSINESSLINE, PARTSLINE etc. often want to go directly to that application’s main menu after they sign on. This is easy to do if the user wants to go to a BUSINESSLINE or PARTSLINE Main Menu. (If they want a SALESLINE OR SERVICELINE main menu, the user profile will need to be changed). For a BUSINESSLINE or PARTSLINE Main Menu: Have the customer display the menu they want automatically displayed after sign on, then press F23.

Initial Program Initial Library Initial Menu

SERVICELINE SVMAINCL SVLIBR DMM000

SALESLINE SLMAINCL SLLIBR DMM000

INITIAL LIBRARY

SALIBR

SALIBR OR *LIBL

Job Description Library

SVJOBD SVLIBR

SLJOBD SLLIBR

10-14


August 2000


Change a user profile 1.

At a command line, type CHGUSRPRF and press F4. Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) Type choices, press Enter. User profile

>


2.

GARY

Name


F12=Cancel

Type the name of the User profile to change and press Enter. The Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) screen displays: Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES, PRESS ENTER. USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL

CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION'

> GARY *SAME *NO *ENABLED *USER *SYSVAL

DBLIBR SA0030CL SALIBR DMM000 *LIBL

NAME NAME, *SAME, *NONE *SAME, *NO, *YES *SAME, *ENABLED, *DISABLED *SAME, *USER, *SYSOPR... *SAME, *SYSVAL, *BASIC... NAME, *SAME, *CRTDFT NAME, *SAME, *NONE NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB NAME, *SAME, *SIGNOFF

NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NO *SAME, *NO, *PARTIAL, *YES 'DEFAULT USER PROFILE SETUP'

F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F5=REFRESH F10-ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS F13=HOW TO USE THIS DISPLAY F24=MORE KEYS

3.

F12=CANCEL

Change parameters as needed.

August 2000

Security

10-15


Change Password 1.

At a command line, type CHGPWD and press Enter. The Change Password screen displays: Change Password Password last changed . . . . . . . . . . :

04/18/00

Type choices, press Enter. Current password New password

. . . . . . . . . . . . _______

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . _______

New password (to verify)

F3=Exit

2.

. . . . . . . . _______

F12=Cancel

Type the Current Password, then type the New password two times and press Enter.

10-16


August 2000


Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments To Enter/Update Dealer System assignments: 1.

At a command line, type GO DMM000

and press Enter.

2.

From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu, type 6, System Administration Menu, and press Enter. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu DMM005 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3.

Backups Communications Security

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work - Station Printer Assignments

11. 13.

Name and Address Menu

Reset Remote Dial Connection 23. 24. Selection or command: ==> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 Main Menu

3


Type 7, Enter/Update Dealer Systems Assignments, and press Enter.

!

The Hand Check printer is assigned in BUSINESSLINE XL. The S/O and R/O Invoices are assigned through SERVICELINE XL.

August 2000

Security

10-17

IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS ACSSYS-01 Initial Heading

DEALERLINE TRAINING CO. #01

Multiple Company..........Y Y/N (more than one company) Default Company Number....01 Normally 01 for single company (main company) Default System Printer....P1 Security................ 1 (1, or 2) (main printer) (do NOT change this one) Normal Print Assignment (printer assignments) Purchase Order............

Parts:

Work Order................P6 #1 Hand Check Printer........P3

Invoicing.................P1 S/O Invoice...............P1

#2

#3

#4 Picking...................P1

Cash Receipts Printer.....P1

SOS:

Audit Report..............P1

CMD-7 End Job

4.

Modify the printer assignments as needed and press Enter.

5.

Continue through the remaining screens for each company.

! 6.

If it is necessary to define printers by workstation ID, press F7 to display the Workstation Printer Assignments screen (see the next subsection). This option should not be used unless instructed by an EDS Customer Support Representative.

Press Enter to display the next screen:

Initial Heading

DEALERLINE CO. #16 - (1) (company heading)

Default Company Number....01 Default System Printer....P6 Normal Print Assignment Purchase Order............

Parts:

Work Order................P6 #1

Invoicing.................P1 S/O Invoice...............P1

#2

#3

#4

Hand Check Printer........

Picking...................P1

Cash Receipts Printer.....P3

SOS:

Audit Report..............P1

CMD-7 End Job

7.

Press Enter. The Workstation Printer Assignments screen displays. Complete one of the following: •

If a printer assignment needs to be changed for a specific workstation, continue to the next section, Workstation Printer Assignments. The Workstation Printer Assignments should be used only if instructed by an EDS Customer Support Representative, or an Installer.

Or •

10-18

If no printer assignment needs to be changed for a specific workstation, press F7, End Job.


August 2000


Workstation Printer Assignments

The Workstation Printer Assignments should be used only if instructed by an EDS Customer Support Representative, or an Installer. This option define printers by their Workstation ID. 1.

If a printer assignment needs to be changed for a specific workstation: Workstation Printer Assignments

AD015-01

Enter Company Number and Workstation ID

Company Number. . . . . . . . . .01

Workstation ID . . . . . .A5

CMD-2 NEXT COMPANY

CMD-7 End Job

Type the Company Number and the Workstation ID, and press Enter. 2.

The next Workstation Printer Assignments screen displays: Workstation Printer Assignments Company Number. . . . . . . . . .01

AD015-02

Workstation ID . . . . . .A5

Workstation Printer Assignments Purchase Order............

Parts:

Work Order................

S/O Invoice............... #2

#3

#4

Hand Check Printer........ Cash Receipts Printer.....

CMD-2 NEXT CO# CMD-7 END JOB

3.

Invoicing.................

Picking................... SOS:

Audit Report..............

CMD-3 NEXT WORKSTATION

CMD-4 DELETE CMD-9 CO# SEARCH

Complete the remaining fields and press Enter. After the job completes, press F7, End Job.

August 2000

Security

10-19

IBM SECURITY SCREENS

IBM SECURITY SCREENS Create a User Profile To setup an IBM User Profile: 1.

At a command line, type CRTUSRPRF and press Enter. CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES, PRESS ENTER.

2.

USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL

BURT *USRPRF *NO *ENABLED *USER *SYSVAL

CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY

DBLIBR SA0030CL SALIBR DMM000 SALIBR

NAME NAME, *USRPRF, *NONE *NO, *YES *ENABLED, *DISABLED *USER, *SYSOPR, *PGMR... *SYSVAL, *BASIC, *INTERMED... NAME, *CRTDFT NAME, *NONE NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB NAME, *SIGNOFF

LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION'

NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NO *NO, *PARTIAL, *YES GENERAL MANAGER



F12=CANCEL

After completing the fields on this screen, press F10, Additional Parameters. Then press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen. CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES, PRESS ENTER. ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS Special authority > + for more values Special environment > Display sign-on information > Password expiration interval > Limit device sessions > Keyboard buffering > Maximum allowed storage > Highest schedule priority > Job description > Library > Group profile > Owner >

*USRCLS

*USRCLS,*NONE,

*SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NOMAX 3 DLJOBD SALIBR *NONE *USRPRF

*SYSVAL, *NONE, *S36 *SYSVAL, *NO, *YES 1-366, *SYSVAL, *NOMAX *SYSVAL, *YES, *NO... *SYSVAL, *NO, *TYPEAHEAD KILOBYTES, *NOMAX 0-9 NAME NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB NAME, *NONE *USRPRF,*GRPPRF

*ALLOBJ

MORE... F3=ExitT F4=Prpomt F24=More keys

3.



After completing the fields on this screen, press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen.

10-20


August 2000


Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices, press Enter.

3.

Group authority > Group authority type.............> Supplemental groups..............> + for more values Accounting code > Document Password................> Message queue > Library Delivery > Severity code filter > Print device > Output queue > Library Attention program >

*NONE *PRIVATE *NONE


F12=Cancel

F5=Refresh

*NONE, *ALL, * CHANGE, *USE... *PRIVATE, *PGP Name, *NONE

*BLANK *NONE *USRPRF

Name, *NONE Name, *USRPRF Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NOTIFY, *BREAK, *HOLD, *DFT 0-99 Name, *WRKSTN, *SYSVAL Name, *WRKSTN, *DEV Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, *NONE, *SYSVAL, *ASSIST

NOTIFY 0 P2 *DEV *SYSVAL


After completing the fields on this screen, press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen. Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices, press Enter. Sort Sequence > Library........................> Language ID......................> Country ID ......................> Coded character set ID...........> Locale job attributes............> + for more values Locale...........................>

*SYSVAL

User options ....................> + for more values User ID number ..................> Group ID number .................> Home Directory...................>

*NONE

*NONE, *CLKWD, *EXPERT...

*GEN *NONE *USRPRF

1-4294967294, *GEN 1-4294967294, *NONE, *GEN

*SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL

Name, *SYSVAL, *HEX. Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *SYSVAL... *SYSVAL... *SYSVAL, *HEX... *SYSVAL, *HEX, *CCSID...

*SYSVAL

Authority........................> *EXCLUDE

*ALL, *CHANGE, *USE< *EXCLUDE Bottom


! 4.

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


Defaults should ALWAYS be used on this screen.

Use the defaults on this screen; press Enter to save the information.

August 2000

Security

10-21


Create User Profile Screen Definitions

First screen User Profile

User ID name can only be modified using the Change (CHGUSRPRF) procedure.

User Password

Type the user password. If *USRPRF value is left here, the system uses your User Profile entry as the password.

Set Password to Expire

*YES forces the user to change their password every so many days. The number of days is defined in system values. Leaving the *NO default will allow password changes, but not force them.

Status

The status of the user profile should be *Enabled. A Disabled user cannot sign on. If user receives message: User XXX cannot sign on, check if the status is Disabled.

User Class

Use one of the IBM user classes defined on page 4, based on user needs.

Assistance Level

Defines to the system the level of help or assistance needed. Choices are basic, intermediate or advanced. Leaving the *SYSVAL default will use the system defined value.

Current Library

Defines library user will function in. This value should be DBLIBR.

Initial Program to Call

Based on where the user is accessing from. There are four choices: For all ID's use SA0030CL, except for SALESLINE XL users SLMAINCL, and for SERVICELINE XL users – SVMAINCL.

Library

Library to find initial program. SA0030CL is in SALIBR, SLMAINCL is found in SLLIBR and SVMAINCL is found in SVLIBR.

Initial Menu/Library

First menu the user will see and the library it is located in. Base this entry on specific user needs. If user receives message: Job ending immediately. Display job log for more information, it is very likely the library attached to the initial menu is wrong. DMM000 is most commonly used for Initial Menu.

Limit Capabilities

*YES will restrict user's use of the command line. *NO will not limit them, but their command knowledge may.

Text Description


10-22


August 2000


Second screen Use the default values on this screen except: Special Authority Job Description



•

If the user is a SERVICELINE XL user the value should be SVJOBD which is an acronym for: SERVICELINE ADVISOR JOB DESCRIPTION.

Library


Third screen Use the default values on this screen except: Print Device


Output Queue


August 2000

Security

10-23


Change a User Profile 1.

At a command line, type CHGUSRPRF and press F4. Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) Type choices, press Enter. User profile

>


2.

GARY

Name


F12=Cancel

Type the name of the User profile to change and press Enter. The Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) screen displays: Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES, PRESS ENTER. USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL

> GARY *SAME *NO *ENABLED *USER *SYSVAL

CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION'

DBLIBR SA0030CL SALIBR DMM000 *LIBL

NAME NAME, *SAME, *NONE *SAME, *NO, *YES *SAME, *ENABLED, *DISABLED *SAME, *USER, *SYSOPR... *SAME, *SYSVAL, *BASIC... NAME, *SAME, *CRTDFT NAME, *SAME, *NONE NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB NAME, *SAME, *SIGNOFF

NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NO *SAME, *NO, *PARTIAL, *YES 'PARTS MANAGER ' MORE.

F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F5=REFRESH F10-ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS F13=HOW TO USE THIS DISPLAY F24=MORE KEYS

2.

F12=CANCEL

After completing the fields on this screen, press F10, Additional Parameters. Then press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen.

10-24


August 2000


Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES, PRESS ENTER. ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS Special authority > + for more values Special environment > Display sign-on information > Password expiration interval > Limit device sessions > Keyboard buffering > Maximum allowed storage > Highest schedule priority > Job description > Library > Group profile > Owner >

*ALLJOB

*USRCLS,*NONE,

*ALLOBJ

*SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NOMAX 3 DLJOBD SALIBR *NONE *USRPRF

*SYSVAL, *NONE, *S36 *SYSVAL, *NO, *YES 1-366, *SYSVAL, *NOMAX *SYSVAL, *YES, *NO... *SYSVAL, *NO, *TYPEAHEAD KILOBYTES, *NOMAX 0-9 NAME NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB NAME, *NONE *USRPRF,*GRPPRF MORE...

F3=ExitT F4=Prpomt F24=More keys

3.



After completing the fields on this screen, press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen. Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) Type Choices, press Enter. Group authority Accounting code Message queue Library Delivery Severity code filter Print device Output queue Library Attention program Library User options ................... + for more values

> *NONE > ' ' > *USRPRF > > > >

*NONE, *ALL, * CHANGE, *USE... Name, *USRPRF Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NOTIFY, *BREAK, *HOLD, *DFT 0-99 Name, *WRKSTN, *SYSVAL Name, *WRKSTN, *DEV Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Name, *NONE, *SYSVAL, *ASSIST Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *NONE, *CLKWD, *EXPERT

NOTIFY 0 P2 *DEV

> *SYSVAL > *NONE

BOTTOM F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys

4.

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel


After all changes to the user profile are made, press Enter.

August 2000

Security

10-25


Change User Profile Screen Definitions

First screen User Profile

User ID name can only be modified using the Change (CHGUSRPRF) procedure.

User Password

Type the user password. If *USRPRF value is left here, the system uses your User Profile entry as the password.

Set Password to Expire

*YES forces the user to change their password every so many days. The number of days is defined in system values. Leaving the *NO default will allow password changes, but not force them.

Status

The status of the user profile should be *Enabled. A Disabled user cannot sign on. If user receives message: User XXX cannot sign on, check to see if the status is disabled.

Assistance Level

Defines to the system the level of help or assistance needed. Choices are basic, intermediate or advanced. Leaving the *SYSVAL default will use the system defined value.

Current Library

Defines library user will function in. This value should be DBLIBR.

Initial Menu/Library

First menu the user will see and the library it is located in. Base this entry on specific user needs. If user receives message: Job ending immediately. Display job log for more information, it is very likely the library attached to the initial menu is wrong. DMM000 is most commonly used for the Initial Menu.

Text Description


10-26


August 2000


Second screen Use the default values on this screen except: Special Authority Job Description



•

If the user is a SERVICELINE XL user the value should be SVJOBD which is an acronym for: SERVICELINE ADVISOR JOB DESCRIPTION.

Library


Third screen Use the default values on this screen except: Print Device


Output Queue


August 2000

Security

10-27


Delete a User Profile To delete a user profile: 1.

At a command line, type GO DMM000 and press Enter. DEALERLINE XL Main Menu DMM000 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SDS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE

6. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION 7. 8. 9. 23. 90.

SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RAPID DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off Electronic Data Systems Copyright (C) 1994 All rights reserved.

Selection or command: ==> 6 F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F9=RETRIEVE F12=CANCEL F13=INFORMATION ASSISTANT F16=AS/400 MAIN MENU

2.

Type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. The System Administration Main Menu displays. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu DMM005 Select one of the following: 1. 2.

3. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Backups Communications

Security Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work - Station Printer Assignments

11.

Name and Address Menu

13.

Reset Remote Dial Connection

23. 24.


Selection or command: ==> 3 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 Main Menu

3

Type 3, Security, and press Enter.

10-28


August 2000


The Work with User Security screen displays. SA1025S1 J3


04/18/00 9:50:45


2=Change

3=Copy

4=Delete

5=Display

7=Dir Entry

8=User Profiles

Opt

User ID

User Name

Default Company Number-Name

4

TSMITH PRUSER1 PRMNGR SAUSER1 SMUSER1

Tina Smith Business Office PARTSLINE Default User PARTSLINE Manager System Operator SERVICELINE User

01 01 01 01 01

F3=Exit

DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE

OF OF OF OF OF


Roll Up/Down

4.

At the Opt field, next to the User ID to delete, type 4 and press Enter.

5.

The following screen displays: SA1025S1 J3

DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Confirm Delete of Authorized Users

04/18/00 9:50:50

Press Enter To Confirm Your Choices For 4=Delete Press F12 To Return to Change Your Choices User ID TSMITH

F3=Exit

6.

User Name Tina Smith Business Manager

F12=Cancel

Default Company Number-Name 01 DEALERLINE OF SOUTHFIELD

Roll Up/Down

Press Enter to confirm the delete, or F12 to cancel.

!

A user profile can also be deleted by using the following IBM commands: WRKUSRPRF or DLTUSRPRF

August 2000

Security

10-29

SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 1

SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 1 1.

How would you execute the following, assuming your User ID has authority: A. B. C. D.

2.

The Current library field for an IBM user profile should have a value of: A. B. C.

3.

DBLIBR SALIBR QSYS QUSRSYS

Allow a user to sign onto the AS/400 Define OS/400 functionality Define DEALERLINE XL application access

A DEALERLINE XL Security Profile / ID does not: A. B. C.

10-30

___ General Ledger Menu ___ DEALERLINE XL Main Menu ___ AS/400 Main Menu ___ SALESLINE XL Main Menu

An IBM Security profile / ID does not: A. B. C.

6.

DMM000 MAIN GLM00 SLMAIN

DEALERLINE XL profiles are located in which library? A. B. C. D.

5.

DBLIBR SALIBR QSYS

Match the screen numbers with their names: 1. 2. 3. 4.

4.

Create a user profile Display a user profile Delete a user profile Work with a user profile

Allow a user to sign onto the AS/400 Define OS/400 functionality Define DEALERLINE XL application access


August 2000


7.

To list all IBM user profiles, at a command line, type: ____ ____

8.

WRKUSRPRF *ALL and press Enter. DSPUSRPRF and press Enter.

The security officer field in DEALERLINE XL security allows that user to access the security option. ____ ____

9.

A. B.

True False

Identify the initial program to call and the library for each of the listed applications: Initial Program SALESLINE XL PARTSLINE XL Payroll

August 2000

Library

____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________

Security

10-31

Solutions to Security - Exercise

SOLUTIONS TO SECURITY - EXERCISE 1.

CRTUSRPRF DSPUSRPRF DLTUSRPRF WRKUSRPRF

2.

A

3.

1B 2C 3A 4D

4.

A. All DEALERLINE XL data is in DBLIBR

5.

C

6.

A and B

7.

A. DSPUSRPRF displays one user profile at a time.

8.

True

9.

SLMAIN PRM00 PAM00

10-32

SLLIBR PRLIBR PALIBR


August 2000


SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 1.

The majority of dealership personnel will be user class: _____ _____ _____ _____

2.

A. B. C. D.

Which user class is allowed to add/delete/change any IBM user profile? (Assume each user class has all their default special authorities.) _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

3.

*USER *SYSOPR *SECADM *PGMR

*SECADM *SECOFR *PGMR

The user class "*USER" with system authorities "*ALLOBJ" and "*SAVSYS," can delete, hold, display and release others output. _____ True _____ False

4.

IBM user profiles are located in which library? _____ _____ _____ _____

5.


How would you execute the following? (Assume you have the authority.) A. B. C. D.

6.

A. B. C. D.

Create a user profile Display a user profile Delete a user profile Work with a user profile

___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________

The current library field in an IBM user profile should have a value of: _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

August 2000

DBLIBR SALIBR QSYS

Security

10-33


7.

The job description field in an IBM user profile should have a value of: _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

8.

The initial program field in an IBM user profile for BUSINESSLINE XL value of: _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

9.

DMM000 MAIN GLM00 SLMAIN

A. B. C. D.


Allow a user to sign-on to the AS/400 Define OS/400 functionality Define DEALERLINE XL application access

A DEALERLINE XL Security Profile/ID does not: _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

13.

_____ General Ledger Menu _____ DEALERLINE XL Main Menu _____ AS/400 Main Menu _____ SALESLINE XL Main Menu

An IBM Security Profile/ID does not: _____ A. _____ B. _____ C.

12.

SA30CL in DBLIBR SA0030 in SALIBR SA0030CL in SALIBR

DEALERLINE XL profiles are located in which library? _____ _____ _____ _____

11.

users should have a

Match the screen names with their titles. 1. 2. 3. 4.

10.

DLJOBD in DBLIBR DLJOBD in SALIBR DLJOBD in QSYS

Allow a user to sign-on to the AS/400 Define OS/400 functionality Define DEALERLINE XL application access

The limit capabilities parameter in IBM security limits command line access. _____ True _____ False

10-34


August 2000


14.

To list all IBM user profiles, at any command line type: _____ A. _____ B.

WRKUSRPRF *ALL DSPUSRPRF

and press Enter. 15.

Company access is defined in: _____ A. _____ B.

16.

IBM Security Profile DEALERLINE XL Security Profile

Default printers can be set differently for each company. _____ True _____ False

17.

The security officer field in DEALERLINE XL security allows that user ID to access the security option. _____ True _____ False

18.

Identify the initial menu and library for each of the listed applications:

SALESLINE XL PARTSLINE XL Payroll 19.

Initial Menu Library _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________

User receives error message – “Job ending immediately. Display job log for more information.” What would you do to correct this? ________________________________________________________

20.

User receives error message – “User XXX cannot sign on” – What would you do to correct this?

August 2000

Security

10-35


21.

User calls in and wants you to make some changes to his/her user profile or another user’s profile. What would you do? A. Ask if the caller is the system administrator and walk him/her through the change if he/she says yes they are. B. Just go ahead and make the change, because your job is to take care of the customer no matter what, and our customers would never lie to us. C. Refuse to make the change, because you suspect the caller is lying to you.

22.

What is the difference between DEALERLINE and IBM security?

23.

How would you make changes to DEALERLINE security?

24.

How would you make changes to IBM security? _____________________________________________________________________

10-36


August 2000


Solutions to Security - Exercise 1.

A. Due to the definition of the user class, it has been found that this is the most widely used class.

2.

B. Only *SECOFR can change everything.

3.

False. To complete this, you will need *SPLCTL authority.

4.

C. All user profiles are stored in the IBM system library.

5.

From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu, select option 6 for System Administration and press [ENTER]. Select option 3 for Security and press [ENTER]. In front of ID to copy, type "3" to copy and press [ENTER]. Type new user ID and press [ENTER]. Define IBM parameters and press [ENTER]. Define DEALERLINE XL parameters and press [ENTER]. The same procedure can be followed, however, instead of a "3" to copy, type "5" to display, "4" to delete, and "2" to change (work with user profile), then press [ENTER]. IBM Commands can also be used to perform these procedures.

6.

A.

7.

B.

8.

C.

9.

1b, 2c, 3a, 4d.

10.

A. Remember all DEALERLINE XL data is in DBLIBR.

11.

C.

12.

A and B.

13.

True.

14.

A. DSPUSRPRF will display one user profile at a time.

15.

B.

16.

True, by using the Enter/Update Dealer Systems Assignments option.

August 2000

Security

10-37


Solutions to Security - Exercise (continued) 17.

True.

18.

SLMAIN SLLIBR PRMØØ PRLIBR PAMØØ PALIBR

19.

Go into the user profile and check the library that is attached to the initial menu.

20.

Go into the user profile and check the status to make sure user isn’t disabled.

21.

A.

22.

IBM security is for system functions, while DEALERLINE security pertains to the applications.

23.

Place a 2 to change next to the user profile in Work with User Security.

24.

Place an 8 next to the user profile in Work with User Security or use the following IBM commands: WRKUSRPRF or CHGUSRPRF

.

10-38


August 2000

11

Printers Table of Contents

PRINTERS .................................................................................... 1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 1 TERMINAL TYPES AND PRINTER CONNECTIONS ................... 2 TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER SETUPS .................................. 2 Parallel Attached Printer .......................................................... 2 Serial Printer ............................................................................ 3 TCP/IP Printers ........................................................................ 3 TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING............... 4 TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 9

August 2000

Printers

11-i

Table of Contents


11-ii


August 2000

PRINTERS

PRINTERS OVERVIEW This chapter will cover the different types of terminals and printers used by EDS and basic printer issues for both Twinax attached printers and TCP/IP printers.

August 2000

Printers

11-1

TERMINAL TYPES AND PRINTER CONNECTIONS

TERMINAL TYPES AND PRINTER CONNECTIONS Printers can be Parallel or Serial (Stand Alone). Parallel printers are physically connected (slaved) to a Terminal or PC. A terminal is also referred to as a ‘DUM’ terminal – A ‘DUM’ terminal has no processor of it’s own and receives all of it’s information from the AS400. A ‘DUM’ terminal will have 24 function keys on the keyboard. The newer IBM terminals have a base that looks like a processor, but this base will never have a CD drive, floppy drive or tape drive. The base on the newer IBM terminals will have connections for the power cord, keyboard, monitor cable, and pigtail. P.C.’s (Personal Computer) will have 12 function keys on the keyboard, a mouse, and the monitor will be connected to a processor which has a CD drive, floppy drive, tape drive, and hard drive. P.C.’s can be used to emulate to the AS400 (DEALERLINE). EDS uses TCP/IP and TWINAX ATTACHED workstations and printers – the difference between the two is how the devices communicate with the AS/400. A TCP/IP device communicates thru a network controller which would create a virtual device description, and needs an I/P address (an example of an I/P address is 10.129.82.110). A TWINAX ATTACHED printer communicates thru a workstation controller card, and has a controller address with a port/address. An example would be port 1 address 5.

TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER SETUPS Parallel Attached Printer Parallel attached printers receive all of their information from the terminal or PC they are physically connected to – the printer address must be set up in the terminal (DUM) the printer is physically connected to. A parallel printer connected to a PC will share the PC’s address. The printer is connected to the terminal or PC by a bi-directional parallel cable which is usually black, gray or beige in color and is approx. 6ft to 25ft in length. (Parallel cable for a Laser printer can have a maximum length of 10 ft ONLY). The connectors on the parallel cable are about 2 inches wide and are rectangular in shape. The back of the terminal or PC has a parallel printer port and this is where the parallel cable is connected to from the printer. To determine what workstation a printer is parallel to: 1. Leave the printer powered on and signoff the workstation you believe the printer is parallel to. 2. Power off the workstation, then power the workstation back on; the printer should initialize/response as if it was just powered on.

11-2


August 2000

TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER SETUPS

Serial Printer (Stand Alone) Serial Printers receive their printer address and information from a serial card or I/O card, this card allows the printer to communicate with the AS/400. The cable connection for a serial printer will either be a twinax cable or twisted pair cable. The twinax cable has about a ½ inch wide round silver connector and is either connected to a pigtail, T-connector or may be connected directly into a twinax connector on the printer. The twisted pair cable will be connected to a balun which is a 6 inch cable that on one side has a twinax connector on it, and the other side has a RJ45 end on it.

TCP/IP Printers A TCP/IP printer needs an I/P address (Internet Protocol) – an example of an I/P address is 10.129.82.110 TCP/IP Printers are considered a NETWORK printer. (This Stand Alone printer would use CAT5 cable and be connector thru a hub.) Usually a TCP/IP printer is a Laser printer, the exception would be a printer attached to an external LAN adapter card such as a Mark Net Pro card. Laser printers will have a menu option on the control panel that allows an I/P address to be configured and will also have an I/O card installed. TCP/IP Stand Alone printer CABLE will ALWAYS be CAT5 to a hub.

August 2000

Error! No text of specified style in document.

11-3

TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING

TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING The following commands and procedures are used for basic TWINAX ATTACHED printer troubleshooting. •

One of the most common problems is your printout NOT printing. To assist you, here are a list of questions that will walk you through troubleshooting basic printer problems. Look at the printer: Is the printer powered on? Is there paper loaded? Is the paper jammed? Is the printer on-line or ready?

Use command WRKWTR: 1.

At a command line, type WRKWTR and press Enter. The Work with All Printers screen displays. Work with All Printers

Type options, press Enter. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue Opt Device P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9

Sts MSGW STR STR HLD STR END STR STR END

Sep *FILE *FILE *FILE *FILE *FILE

Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL

*FILE *FILE

*ALL *ALL

File QSYSPRT

6=Release User MSECOFR

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or command ===> F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top F18=Bottom

11-4

User Data FX511B

F24=More keys

•


•


•


•

Is the writer ended? (END would display in the Sts field)


August 2000

TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING •

If TWINAX ATTACHED printer still is not printing after verification of the previous steps, complete one of the following sections depending on if TWINAX ATTACHED printer is parallel or serial (stand alone).

Parrallel printer connected to a DUM terminal Resetting a PARALLEL printer connected to a DUMB (DUM) terminal. (TWINAX ATTAHCED PRINTER). 1.

End writer: - WRKWTR xx*

(xx = printer ID)

OR

WRKWTR

- Type 4 to left of printer to end printer, press F4 - Type *IMMED at When to end writer field and press Enter. End Writer (ENDWTR) Type choices, press Enter. Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . > PA When to end writer . . . . . . . *IMMED


2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9. 10.

11. 12. 13.

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

Name, *SYSVAL, *ALL *CNTRLD, *IMMED, *PAGEEND


Power off the printer Sign off of terminal that printer is attached to. Power off terminal that printer is attached to. Power on printer Wait for printer to initialize (below are the most common ways printers initialize) - print head will move back and forth - paper will back out and then reload - a laser printer’s control panel will go thru tests and than the control panel will display READY Power on terminal that printer is attached to. Prior to terminal going to sign on screen, printer will again initialize. Make sure paper is loaded and printer is on-line or ready. Verify printer has a VARIED ON status (wrkcfgsts *dev xx) xx=printer ID - If status is VARY ON PENDING, verify parallel cable is secure at both ends (connection at terminal and printer) Start printer (WRKWTR) Send job to printer Answer printer message (WRKWTR)

August 2000


11-5


Parrallel printer connected to a PC using Client Access Resetting a PARALLEL printer connected to a PC using CLIENT ACCESS. (TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Power off printer Wait about 1 minute and than Power printer back on - paper should be loaded and printer must be on-line or ready status. Close any open printer sessions (these may be running minimized on task bar.) Double click printer ICON from desktop (usually ICON is labeled the same as printer ID). The following screen displays:

6. If the above screen DOES NOT display (status window is all black), continue to step 8. 7. If the above screen DOES display, verify the READY & ON-LINE status lights are Green.

11-6

•

If the READY & ON-LINE status lights are green, minimize this screen and return to your AS400 session. This printer should now be working.

•

If the READY & ON-LINE status lights are NOT on, contact ARG CUSTOMER SUPPORT for help with additional troubleshooting


August 2000


8

9.

If the status window is all black, confirm the printer status, by selecting the Communication selection from the tool bar as displayed below.

Verify Check mark appears next to Autoconnect. If Check mark DOES NOT appear, click on option Autoconnect.

10. Then re-select Communication selection from tool bar. Click on option Connect. 11. The Status screen displays again and the READY & ON-LINE lights should be green. •

If the READY & ON-LINE status lights are green, minimize this screen and return to your AS400 session. This printer should now be working.

•

If the READY & ON-LINE status lights are NOT on, Contact ARG CUSTOMER SUPPORT for help with additional troubleshooting.

August 2000


11-7


Serial (Stand Alone) printer Resetting a SERIAL (Stand Alone) printer. (TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER) 1.

End writer: - WRKWTR xx*

(xx = printer ID)

OR

WRKWTR

- Type 4 to left of printer to end printer, press F4 - Type *IMMED at When to end writer field and press Enter. End Writer (ENDWTR) Type choices, press Enter. Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . > PA When to end writer . . . . . . . *IMMED


2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8. 9.

11-8

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

Name, *SYSVAL, *ALL *CNTRLD, *IMMED, *PAGEEND


Power off the printer Wait about 1 minute, then power the printer back on. Wait for printer to initialize (below are the most common ways printers initialize) - print head will move back and forth - paper will back out and then reload - a laser printer’s control panel will go thru tests and than the control panel will display READY Make sure paper is loaded and printer is on-line or ready. Verify printer has a VARIED ON status (wrkcfgsts *dev xx) xx=printer ID - If status is VARY ON PENDING, verify parallel cable is secure at both ends (connection at terminal and printer) Start printer (WRKWTR) Send job to printer Answer printer message (WRKWTR)


August 2000

TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING

TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING The following commands and procedures are used for basic TCP/IP printer troubleshooting. •

One of the most common problems is your printout NOT printing. To assist you, here are a list of questions that will walk you through troubleshooting basic printer problems. Look at the printer: Is the printer powered on? Is there paper loaded? Is the paper jammed? Is the printer on-line or ready?

August 2000


11-9


Use command WRKWTR: At a command line, type WRKWTR *ALL and press Enter. The Work with All Writers screen displays. Work with All Writers Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with output queue Opt


Type RMT RMT RMT RMT PRT RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT

Device

FV

5=Work with

6=Release



7=Display messages Status STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR



F24=More keys

Does the Printer ID display under the Writer column? -

If the Printer ID does not display: a. From a command line type STRRMTWTR *ALL and press Enter. b. Press F5 to refresh the Work with All Writers screen c. Verify the printer ID shows up on Work with All Writers screen. d. If the printer ID does NOT show up on Work with All Writers screen, please contact EDS CUSTOMER SUPPORT HARDWARE.

The following questions can be answered from using the WRKWTR *ALL command: •


•


•


STRRMTWTR xx (xx=printer ID) OR a TCP/IP printer.

11-10

STRRMTWTR


*ALL command can be used to start

August 2000

TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING •

If TCP/IP printer still is not printing after verification of the previous steps, continue with the following steps.

Resetting a TCP/IP SERIAL (Stand Alone) printer. 1. 2. 3. 4.

End writer (WRKWTR *ALL) Power off the printer Wait about 1 minute and than power printer back on Wait for printer to initialize (below are the most common ways printers initialize) - print head will move back and forth - paper will back out and than reload - a laser printer’s control panel will go thru tests, then the control panel displays READY 5. Make sure paper is loaded and printer is on-line or ready 6. Start printer (STRRMTWTR xx) xx=printer ID or (STRRMTWTR *ALL) 7. Send job to printer 8. Answer printer message (WRKWTR *ALL) 9. If printer DOES NOT print, continue with step 10. 10. Verify that the AS/400 physically see’s printer by PINGING the printer’s IP (Internet Address) address. • To find the IP (Internet address) address of the printer: a. At a command line type WRKOUTQ xx * (xx = printer ID ) and press Enter (asterisk * must be typed after printer ID) b. Type 8, Description, next to the correct printer ID and press Enter. c. Page down once to locate the Internet Address (IP) Example: Queue for writer messages . . . . . . : QSYSOPR Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : *LIBL Connection type . . . . . . . . . . . : *IP Internet address . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.186.68.113 Destination type . . . . . . . . . . . : *OTHER Host print transform . . . . . . . . . : *YES The Internet address in this example is 10.186.68.113

August 2000


11-11


•

Another way to find the IP (Internet address) address of the printer is to display the TCP/IP Host Table Entries. To display the TCP/IP Host Table Entries: a.

At a command line, type CFGTCP

b.

The Configure TCP/IP screen displays CFGTCP

and press Enter.

Configure TCP/IP System:

S1024606

Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Work with TCP/IP interfaces Work with TCP/IP routes Change TCP/IP attributes Work with TCP/IP port restrictions Work with TCP/IP remote system information

10. Work with TCP/IP host table entries 11. Merge TCP/IP host table 12. Change TCP/IP domain information 20. Configure TCP/IP applications 21. Configure related tables 22. Configure point-to-point TCP/IP Selection or command ===> F3=Exit

F4=Prompt

F9=Retrieve

F12=Cancel

c.

Type 10, Work with TCP/IP host table entries, and press Enter.

d.

The Work with TCP/IP Host Table Entries screen displays Work with TCP/IP Host Table Entries System:

Type options, press Enter. 1=Add 2=Change 4=Remove Internet Address

Opt

e.

F5=Refresh

Host DA Q4 Q7 Q8 Q9 S1024606.AUBURN.SNA.IBM.COM DUNDEE01.AUBURN.SNA.IBM.COM SCHAUM01.AUBURN.SNA.IBM.COM JG JF JE JD JC F6=Print list

F12=Cancel

F17=Position to

The internet address in this example for printer DA is 10.186.158.48

11. To ping the printer’s IP Address, at a command line type ‘xx.xxx.xxx.xxx’ and press enter (x’s = internet address)

11-12

S1024606

7=Rename

Name

10.186.158.48 10.186.158.73 10.186.158.74 10.186.158.75 10.186.158.76 10.186.158.131 10.187.28.66 10.187.28.132 10.187.28.152 10.187.28.153 10.187.28.154 10.187.28.155 10.187.28.156 More... F3=Exit

5=Display


PING

August 2000


12. If message ‘Connection Verification…’ is received continue with step 13. •

If error message ‘No response from host…’ displays, verify CAT5 cable is secure on the back of the printer. A green light should be on where the cable is connected to the printer,

•

If no green light, verify the printer is powered on.

•

If printer is powered on, disconnect CAT5 cable and reconnect cable. If still no green light, replace this CAT5 cable.

•

If green light is on, return to step 10 and 11 to verify PING procedure works for printer

•

If still no green light, additional troubleshooting is required, please contact EDS CUSTOMER SUPPORT HARDWARE.

13.

Start printer (STRRMTWTR xx) xx=printer ID or (STRRMTWTR *ALL)

14.

Send job to printer.

15.

Answer printer message (WRKWTR *ALL).

August 2000


11-13



11-14


August 2000

Complete AS400 System Administrator

Recommend Documents